HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp Service Manual ENWW

HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp Service Manual ENWW
HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp
Service Manual
HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp series
Service Manual
Copyright and License
Trademark Credits
© 2005 Copyright Hewlett-Packard
Development Company, L.P.
Adobe® is a trademark of Adobe Systems
Incorporated.
Reproduction, adaptation, or translation
without prior written permission is
prohibited, except as allowed under the
copyright laws.
Corel® and CorelDRAW™ are trademarks
or registered trademarks of Corel
Corporation or Corel Corporation Limited.
The information contained in this document
is subject to change without notice.
The only warranties for HP products and
services are set forth in the express
warranty statements accompanying such
products and services. Nothing herein
should be construed as constituting an
additional warranty. HP shall not be liable
for technical or editorial errors or omissions
contained herein.
Part number Q7517-91020
Edition 1, 11/2005
Energy Star® and the Energy Star logo®
are U.S. registered marks of the United
States Environmental Protection Agency.
Microsoft® is a U.S. registered trademark
of the Microsoft Corporation.
Netscape Navigator is a U.S. trademark of
Netscape Communications.
PANTONE® Colors generated may not
match PANTONE-identified standards.
Consult current PANTONE Publications for
accurate color. PANTONE® and other
Pantone, Inc. trademarks are the property
of Pantone, Inc. © Pantone, Inc., 2000.
PostScript® is a trademark of Adobe
Systems.
TrueType™ is a U.S. trademark of Apple
Computer, Inc.
UNIX® is a registered trademark of The
Open Group.
Windows®, MS Windows®, and Windows
NT® are U.S. registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation.
Table of contents
1 Product information
HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp series configurations..................................................................................2
HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp (Q7517A)...................................................................................2
HP Color LaserJet 4730x mfp (Q7518A)................................................................................3
HP Color LaserJet 4730xs mfp (Q7519A)..............................................................................3
HP Color LaserJet 4730xm mfp (Q7520A).............................................................................4
Features and benefits of the MFP...........................................................................................................5
Functions.................................................................................................................................5
Speed and throughput............................................................................................................5
Resolution...............................................................................................................................5
Memory...................................................................................................................................5
User interface..........................................................................................................................5
Language and fonts ...............................................................................................................6
Copying and sending..............................................................................................................6
Print cartridges........................................................................................................................6
Paper handling........................................................................................................................6
Connectivity.............................................................................................................................7
Environmental features...........................................................................................................7
Security features.....................................................................................................................7
Minimum system requirements for e-mail functionality..........................................................8
MFP parts and accessories.....................................................................................................................9
MFP parts................................................................................................................................9
Interface ports.......................................................................................................................11
Model and serial numbers....................................................................................................11
Accessories and supplies.....................................................................................................12
Parts compatibility with other HP LaserJet products............................................................13
Moving the MFP....................................................................................................................14
Site requirements...................................................................................................................................15
Physical specifications..........................................................................................................15
Environmental specifications................................................................................................15
MFP specifications................................................................................................................................16
Electrical specifications.........................................................................................................16
Acoustic specifications..........................................................................................................17
Image area............................................................................................................................17
Skew specifications...............................................................................................................17
Media specifications..............................................................................................................................18
Printing and paper storage environment..............................................................................18
Envelopes.............................................................................................................................19
Envelopes that have double side seams.............................................................20
Envelopes that have adhesive strips or flaps......................................................20
ENWW
iii
Envelope margins................................................................................................20
Envelope storage.................................................................................................20
Labels....................................................................................................................................21
Label construction................................................................................................21
Transparencies.....................................................................................................................21
Supported types and sizes of print media............................................................................22
Printing on special media......................................................................................................................27
Transparencies.....................................................................................................................27
Glossy paper.........................................................................................................................27
Colored paper.......................................................................................................................28
Envelopes.............................................................................................................................28
Labels....................................................................................................................................28
Heavy paper..........................................................................................................................29
HP LaserJet Tough paper.....................................................................................................29
Preprinted forms and letterhead...........................................................................................29
Recycled paper.....................................................................................................................30
Weight equivalence table......................................................................................................30
Regulatory information..........................................................................................................................32
FCC and Telecom regulations..............................................................................................32
FCC regulations...................................................................................................32
Telecom................................................................................................................32
Environmental Product Stewardship program......................................................................33
Protecting the environment..................................................................................33
Ozone production.................................................................................................33
Energy consumption............................................................................................33
HP LaserJet printing supplies..............................................................................33
Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the
European Union...................................................................................................35
Material safety data sheet....................................................................................35
For more information............................................................................................35
Country/region-specific safety statements............................................................................36
Laser safety statement.........................................................................................36
Canadian DOC statement....................................................................................36
Japanese VCCI statement...................................................................................36
Korean EMI statement.........................................................................................37
Japanese cordset statement................................................................................37
Taiwan safety statement......................................................................................37
Finnish laser statement........................................................................................38
Australia...............................................................................................................38
Declaration of conformity (HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp)......................................................................39
2 Service approach
Service approach...................................................................................................................................42
Parts and supplies.................................................................................................................................43
Ordering parts, supplies, and accessories over the Internet................................................43
Ordering directly through the embedded Web server (for MFPs with network
connections)..........................................................................................................................43
Exchange program................................................................................................................43
Supplies................................................................................................................................43
World Wide Web...................................................................................................................43
iv
ENWW
HP Service Parts Information...............................................................................................44
HP available services............................................................................................................................45
Hewlett-Packard Limited Warranty Statement......................................................................................47
Print Cartridge Limited Warranty Statement.........................................................................................48
HP maintenance agreements................................................................................................................49
Priority Onsite Service..........................................................................................................49
Next business day.................................................................................................................49
Installation and maintenance kit replacement......................................................................49
3 Installation and configuration
Installation checklist...............................................................................................................................52
Unpacking the MFP...............................................................................................................................54
Loading detectable standard-sized media into Tray 2, 3, and 4...........................................................58
Loading undetectable standard-sized media into Tray 2, 3, and 4.......................................................60
Connecting power..................................................................................................................................63
Installing print cartridges........................................................................................................................64
Installing a new control panel overlay...................................................................................................66
Testing the MFP operation....................................................................................................................67
Sleep delay............................................................................................................................................68
Setting Sleep delay...............................................................................................................68
Disabling/enabling Sleep mode............................................................................................68
Connecting to a computer or network...................................................................................................69
Network connection..............................................................................................................69
Parallel connection................................................................................................................69
Fax connection......................................................................................................................70
Analog faxing........................................................................................................70
Connecting the fax accessory to a phone line....................................70
Configuring and using the fax features...............................................71
Digital faxing.........................................................................................................71
Printer software......................................................................................................................................72
Software................................................................................................................................72
Software features.................................................................................................72
Driver Autoconfiguration.......................................................................................72
Update Now..........................................................................................................72
HP Driver Preconfiguration..................................................................................73
Installing the printing system software..................................................................................73
Installing Windows printing system software for direct connections....................73
Installing Windows printing system software for networks..................................74
Setting up a Windows computer to use the network MFP with Windowssharing..................................................................................................................75
Installing the software after the parallel or USB cable has been connected.......75
Uninstalling the software.......................................................................................................75
Removing software from Windows operating systems........................................76
Software for networks...........................................................................................................76
HP Web Jetadmin................................................................................................76
UNIX.....................................................................................................................77
Utilities...................................................................................................................................77
HP Easy Printer Care Software...........................................................................77
Embedded Web server........................................................................................77
Features..............................................................................................78
ENWW
v
Other components and utilities............................................................................78
Printer drivers........................................................................................................................................79
Supported printer drivers......................................................................................................79
Additional drivers..................................................................................................................79
Selecting the correct printer driver........................................................................................80
Printer driver Help (Windows)...............................................................................................80
Gaining access to Windows printer drivers..........................................................................81
Printer drivers for Macintosh computers................................................................................................82
Supported Macintosh printer drivers.....................................................................................82
Gaining access to Macintosh printer drivers.........................................................................82
Software for Macintosh computers........................................................................................................84
Installing Macintosh printing system software for networks.................................................84
Installing Macintosh printing system software for direct connections (USB)........................85
To remove software from Macintosh operating systems......................................................86
Network configuration............................................................................................................................87
Configuring TCP/IP parameters............................................................................................87
To manually configure TCP/IP parameters from the MFP control panel.............87
Setting an IP address...........................................................................................87
Setting the subnet mask.......................................................................................88
Setting the default gateway..................................................................................88
Disabling network protocols (optional).................................................................89
Disabling IPX/SPX...............................................................................................89
Disabling DLC/LLC...............................................................................................89
Disabling AppleTalk.............................................................................................90
Security features....................................................................................................................................91
Securing the embedded Web server....................................................................................91
To secure the embedded Web server..................................................................91
Foreign Interface Harness (FIH)...........................................................................................91
Requirements.......................................................................................................91
Using the FIH.......................................................................................................91
To enable the FIH portal......................................................................91
To disable the FIH portal.....................................................................92
Secure Disk Erase................................................................................................................92
Data affected........................................................................................................92
Gaining access to Secure Disk Erase..................................................................93
Additional Information..........................................................................................93
Job storage features.............................................................................................................93
DSS authentication...............................................................................................................93
Locking the control panel menus..........................................................................................93
Locking the formatter cage...................................................................................................94
Optional output and input devices.........................................................................................................95
4 Maintenance
Using the cleaning page........................................................................................................................98
Cleaning the MFP..................................................................................................................................99
Cleaning the outside of the MFP..........................................................................................99
Cleaning the touchscreen.....................................................................................................99
Cleaning the scanner glass..................................................................................................99
Cleaning the ADF delivery system........................................................................................99
To clean the ADF delivery system.....................................................................100
vi
ENWW
To clean the ADF rollers....................................................................................101
Cleaning the mylar strip......................................................................................................104
To clean the mylar strip......................................................................................104
Calibrating the scanner........................................................................................................................106
To print the calibration target..............................................................................................106
Performing preventive maintenance....................................................................................................107
ADF maintenance kit...........................................................................................................107
Managing print cartridges....................................................................................................................108
HP print cartridges..............................................................................................................108
Changing print cartridges....................................................................................................108
Replacing a print cartridge.................................................................................108
Non-HP print cartridges......................................................................................................111
Print cartridge authentication..............................................................................................111
Print cartridge storage........................................................................................................112
Print cartridge life expectancy.............................................................................................112
Checking the supply level...................................................................................................112
Using the product control panel.........................................................................112
Using the embedded Web server......................................................................112
Using HP Web Jetadmin....................................................................................112
Printing a supplies status page..........................................................................112
Approximate replacement intervals for supplies.................................................................................114
ETB life under different circumstances................................................................................................115
Changing print cartridges....................................................................................................................116
Replacing print cartridges...................................................................................................116
Replacing supplies..............................................................................................................................117
Locating supplies................................................................................................................117
Supply replacement guidelines...........................................................................................117
Making room around the MFP for replacing supplies.........................................................118
Replacing the ETB..............................................................................................................118
Replacing the fuser.............................................................................................................119
Replacing the stapler cartridge...........................................................................................119
MFP memory and fonts.......................................................................................................................121
Installing memory and fonts.................................................................................................................122
Installing DDR memory DIMMs..........................................................................................122
Installing a flash memory card............................................................................................128
Enabling memory................................................................................................................132
To enable memory for Windows 98 and Windows Me......................................132
To enable memory for Windows 2000 and Windows XP..................................132
Setting the real-time clock...................................................................................................................133
Setting the date and time....................................................................................................133
To set the date format........................................................................................133
To set the date...................................................................................................133
To set the time format........................................................................................133
To set the time...................................................................................................134
Setting the wake time.........................................................................................................134
To set the wake time..........................................................................................134
Setting the Sleep delay.......................................................................................................135
To set the Sleep delay.......................................................................................135
Configuring and verifying an IP address.............................................................................................136
TCP/IP assignment.............................................................................................................136
ENWW
vii
Automatic discovery...........................................................................................136
Dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP)....................................................136
Verifying the TCP/IP configuration.....................................................................................136
Changing an IP address.....................................................................................................136
To change an IP address by using HP Web Jetadmin......................................136
To change an IP address by using the embedded Web server........................137
To change an IP address by using the control panel........................................137
Upgrading the firmware.......................................................................................................................139
Determining the current level of firmware...........................................................................139
Downloading the new firmware from the HP Web site.......................................................139
Transferring the new firmware to the MFP.........................................................................139
Using FTP to upload the firmware through a browser.......................................139
To use a browser for firmware update..............................................139
Using FTP to upgrade the firmware on a network connection...........................140
To upgrade the firmware on a network connection by using FTP....140
Using HP Web Jetadmin to upgrade the firmware............................................141
Using MS-DOS commands to upgrade the firmware........................................142
Upgrading the HP Jetdirect firmware..................................................................................143
5 Theory of operation
Basic operation....................................................................................................................................146
Operation sequence............................................................................................................147
Operation sequence (scanner)...........................................................................................147
Power on sequence............................................................................................................148
Formatter system.................................................................................................................................150
Sleep mode.........................................................................................................................150
Image Resolution Enhancement technology (REt)............................................................151
Input/Output........................................................................................................................151
Parallel interface................................................................................................151
USB 2.0 connector.............................................................................................151
ACC accessory port...........................................................................................151
Flash...................................................................................................................152
Hard disk............................................................................................................152
CPU....................................................................................................................152
FIH (foreign interface harness)..........................................................................152
MFP memory......................................................................................................................152
Read-only memory.............................................................................................152
Random-access memory...................................................................................152
DIMM slots..........................................................................................................................152
Flash memory....................................................................................................152
Nonvolatile memory...........................................................................................153
PJL overview.......................................................................................................................153
PML.....................................................................................................................................153
Control panel.......................................................................................................................153
Scanner interface................................................................................................................153
Engine control system.........................................................................................................................154
DC controller PCB...............................................................................................................154
Block operation..................................................................................................156
Motors, fans, and environment sensor...............................................................................156
Failure detection.................................................................................................................158
viii
ENWW
Drum motor failure detection..............................................................................159
Fuser motor failure detection.............................................................................159
ETB motor failure detection...............................................................................159
Rear exhaust fan failure detection.....................................................................159
Cartridge fan failure detection............................................................................159
Delivery fan failure detection..............................................................................159
Power supply fan failure detection.....................................................................160
Scanner fan failure detection.............................................................................160
ADF fan failure detection....................................................................................160
Control fans #1 and #2 failure detection............................................................160
Sub power supply fan failure detection..............................................................160
ETB fan failure detection....................................................................................160
Low-voltage power supply..................................................................................................160
Fuser control circuit............................................................................................161
Low-voltage power supply circuit.......................................................................163
Protective functions...........................................................................164
Safety................................................................................................164
Sleep mode.......................................................................................164
Power supply recognition..................................................................164
Heater temperature control.................................................................................................164
Initial rotation temperature control.....................................................................165
Start-up temperature control..............................................................................165
Print temperature control....................................................................................166
Between-sheets temperature control.................................................................166
Temperature protective function.........................................................................................166
Protective function by the CPU..........................................................................166
Protective function by the fuser heater safety circuit.........................................166
Protective function by the thermoswitch............................................................167
Temperature failure detection.............................................................................................167
Start-up failure (warm-up failure).......................................................................167
Abnormal low temperature of main thermistor (no conduction).........................167
Abnormal high temperature of main thermistor.................................................167
Abnormal low temperature of sub thermistor (no conduction)...........................167
Abnormal high temperature of sub thermistor...................................................168
Drive circuit abnormality.....................................................................................168
High-voltage power supply.................................................................................................168
Generation of biases..........................................................................................169
Sub power supply assembly...............................................................................................171
Video interface control........................................................................................................171
Laser/scanner system.........................................................................................................................173
Laser control.......................................................................................................................174
Scanner control...................................................................................................................175
Image formation system......................................................................................................................177
Image formation process....................................................................................................178
Electrostatic latent image formation block..........................................................................180
Step 1: Pre-exposure.........................................................................................180
Step 2: Primary charging....................................................................................181
Step 3: Laser beam exposure............................................................................181
Development block.............................................................................................................181
Step 4: Development..........................................................................................181
ENWW
ix
Transfer block.....................................................................................................................182
Step 5: Attraction................................................................................................182
Step 6: Transfer.................................................................................................182
Step 7: Separation.............................................................................................183
Fusing block........................................................................................................................183
Step 8: Fusing....................................................................................................183
Cleaning block....................................................................................................................184
Step 9: Drum cleaning........................................................................................184
Print cartridges....................................................................................................................184
Memory tag........................................................................................................186
Cartridge presence detection..............................................................................................186
Memory tag detection.........................................................................................186
Photosensitive drum detection...........................................................................186
Developing cylinder disengaging control...........................................................187
ETB (electrostatic transfer/transport belt)...........................................................................187
Transfer roller (Y, C, M) engagement/disengagement detection.......................................189
Transfer roller engagement/disengagement control...........................................................189
Calibration and cleaning.....................................................................................................190
ETB cleaning......................................................................................................191
Color misregistration corrective control.............................................................192
Color misregistration detection...........................................................................................193
Image stabilization control..................................................................................................194
Environmental change control...........................................................................195
Image density calibration control (DMAX).........................................................196
Image halftone calibration control (DHALF).......................................................196
Image density detection.....................................................................................196
Pickup/feed system.............................................................................................................................198
Pickup/feed unit..................................................................................................................203
Cassette detection and cassette media size detection......................................203
Cassette pickup operation.................................................................................204
Media lifting operation........................................................................................204
Initial lift..............................................................................................205
Lift-up during printing.........................................................................205
Multiple-feed prevention.....................................................................................206
Skew correction..................................................................................................207
Media detection..................................................................................................208
Feed speed control............................................................................................209
Fusing and delivery block...................................................................................................210
Loop control........................................................................................................211
Fusing pressure release mechanism.................................................................212
Duplex feed unit..................................................................................................................213
Duplexing reverse/duplexing feed operation.....................................................214
Jam detection......................................................................................................................216
Pickup delay jam................................................................................................217
Pickup stationary jam.........................................................................................217
Delivery delay jam..............................................................................................217
Door open jam....................................................................................................217
Residual paper jam............................................................................................218
Reversing unit jam 1..........................................................................................218
Reversing unit jam 2..........................................................................................218
x
ENWW
Duplexing pickup unit jam 1...............................................................................218
Automatic delivery function................................................................................218
Scanner system...................................................................................................................................219
Electrical system.................................................................................................................219
Motors and fans..................................................................................................................220
Optical assembly.................................................................................................................221
ADF feed system................................................................................................................222
ADF jam detection..............................................................................................................223
Residual media jam............................................................................................................223
ADF pickup jam...................................................................................................................223
ADF jam..............................................................................................................................223
Registration sensor jam.....................................................................................224
Read sensor jam................................................................................................224
Exit sensor jam...................................................................................................224
ADF cover-open jam...........................................................................................................224
ADF open jam.....................................................................................................................224
2 X 500-sheet paper feeder.................................................................................................................225
Pickup and feed operations................................................................................................226
2 X 500-sheet jam detection...............................................................................................228
Output devices.....................................................................................................................................229
IPTU....................................................................................................................................229
IPTU transfer operation......................................................................................230
IPTU jam detection.............................................................................................232
Pickup delay jam...............................................................................232
Pickup stationary jam........................................................................232
Delivery delay jam.............................................................................232
Delivery stationary jam......................................................................232
3-bin mailbox.......................................................................................................................232
Stacker mode.....................................................................................................234
Mailbox mode.....................................................................................................234
Function separator mode...................................................................................234
3-bin mailbox jam detection...............................................................................234
Feed delay jam..................................................................................234
Feed stationary jam...........................................................................235
Residual media jam...........................................................................235
Stapler/stacker....................................................................................................................235
Staple mode.......................................................................................................237
Stacker mode.....................................................................................................237
Staple jam detection...........................................................................................237
Feed delay jam..................................................................................237
Feed stationary jam...........................................................................238
Delivery stationary jam......................................................................238
Residual media jam...........................................................................238
Stapler unit........................................................................................238
6 Removal and replacement
Removal and replacement strategy.....................................................................................................242
Required tools.....................................................................................................................242
Before performing service...................................................................................................243
Removal and replacement sequencing..............................................................................243
ENWW
xi
After completing service.....................................................................................................245
Screws used in the MFP.....................................................................................................246
User-replaceable parts........................................................................................................................247
Print cartridges....................................................................................................................248
Control panel overlays........................................................................................................250
Control panel.......................................................................................................................250
Intermediate paper transfer unit (IPTU)..............................................................................252
Stapler/stacker....................................................................................................................253
Staple cartridge...................................................................................................................255
3-bin mailbox.......................................................................................................................257
ETB assembly, removing....................................................................................................258
MP tray pickup assembly....................................................................................................261
Trays 2, 3, and 4.................................................................................................................261
ADF input tray.....................................................................................................................262
ADF pickup and feed rollers...............................................................................................264
ADF separation pad............................................................................................................266
ADF delivery guide (clear mylar sheet)..............................................................................268
Face-down tray assembly...................................................................................................270
Fuser...................................................................................................................................271
Tray 2, 3, or 4 pickup and feed rollers................................................................................272
MP tray pickup roller...........................................................................................................273
Tray 2 separation roller.......................................................................................................275
Tray 3 or 4 separation rollers..............................................................................................277
Scanner filter cover and scanner filter................................................................................278
ADF hinge flap....................................................................................................................279
Formatter board..................................................................................................................280
Hard drive...........................................................................................................................282
DIMMs.................................................................................................................................284
Flash memory card (firmware)............................................................................................287
Fax accessory.....................................................................................................................288
Covers, doors, and external panels.....................................................................................................291
Face-down tray assembly...................................................................................................293
Delivery cover assembly.....................................................................................................293
Rear cover assembly..........................................................................................................294
Left cover assembly............................................................................................................296
Front cover assembly..........................................................................................................297
Tray 1..................................................................................................................................300
Right lower cover assembly................................................................................................303
Delivery upper cover assembly...........................................................................................306
Right front inner lower cover assembly..............................................................................307
Left rear inner cover assembly...........................................................................................307
Right front inner upper cover assembly..............................................................................308
Right rear inner cover assembly.........................................................................................310
Main assembly (internal assemblies)..................................................................................................313
Paper feed assembly..........................................................................................................316
Pickup drive assembly........................................................................................................320
Lifter drive assembly...........................................................................................................321
Disengaging drive assembly...............................................................................................323
Main drive assembly...........................................................................................................325
Rail holder assembly...........................................................................................................333
xii
ENWW
Rail guide assembly............................................................................................................335
Formatter case assembly...................................................................................................338
Laser/scanner components................................................................................................343
Duplexing assembly............................................................................................................351
Delivery assembly...............................................................................................................353
Fuser drive assembly..........................................................................................................361
Motors and fans...................................................................................................................................362
Drum motors.......................................................................................................................362
Fuser motor.........................................................................................................................363
Fuser pressure release motor.............................................................................................364
Developing disengaging motor...........................................................................................369
Pickup motor assembly.......................................................................................................370
Power supply fan................................................................................................................371
Cartridge fan.......................................................................................................................373
Sub power supply fan.........................................................................................................374
Delivery fan.........................................................................................................................376
Control fan 1.......................................................................................................................377
Control fan 2.......................................................................................................................378
Rear exhaust fan.................................................................................................................379
ETB fan...............................................................................................................................380
PCBs....................................................................................................................................................384
DC controller PCB...............................................................................................................384
Toner level PCB..................................................................................................................389
High-voltage power supply PCB.........................................................................................389
Low-voltage power supply PCB..........................................................................................395
Memory controller PCB.......................................................................................................400
Sub power supply PCB.......................................................................................................401
Fan drive PCB.....................................................................................................................403
Switches, contacts, and sensors.........................................................................................................404
High-voltage contacts.........................................................................................................404
E-label memory contacts and cable...................................................................................405
Power switch assembly......................................................................................................406
Door-open switch assembly................................................................................................408
Environment sensor............................................................................................................409
ADF and scanner components............................................................................................................411
ADF assembly.....................................................................................................................411
Top covers..........................................................................................................................413
Scanner assembly..............................................................................................................414
Scanner left cover...............................................................................................................416
Scanner right cover.............................................................................................................417
Scanner glass.....................................................................................................................418
Optical assembly.................................................................................................................419
Scanner bulb.......................................................................................................................425
Inverter PCB.......................................................................................................................427
Scanner fan.........................................................................................................................428
Scanner home position sensor...........................................................................................429
Scanner controller PCB......................................................................................................431
ADF components.................................................................................................................................432
ADF output bin extension...................................................................................................433
ADF white mylar backing....................................................................................................434
ENWW
xiii
ADF front cover...................................................................................................................437
ADF rear cover ...................................................................................................................438
ADF left side cover..............................................................................................................440
ADF jam access cover and latch........................................................................................441
ADF leading-edge and paper-present sensors..................................................................443
ADF hinges.........................................................................................................................444
2 X 500-sheet paper input assembly components..............................................................................446
Rear cover..........................................................................................................................447
Right front cover..................................................................................................................448
Left front cover....................................................................................................................449
Right cover..........................................................................................................................450
Left cover............................................................................................................................452
Right lower cover assembly................................................................................................454
Pickup motor assembly.......................................................................................................455
Upper lifter drive assembly.................................................................................................456
Lower lifter drive assembly.................................................................................................457
Upper pickup drive assembly..............................................................................................459
Lower pickup drive assembly..............................................................................................459
Upper pickup assembly......................................................................................................460
Lower pickup assembly......................................................................................................466
Paper feeder door-open switch...........................................................................................469
Paper feeder driver PCB.....................................................................................................471
Intermediate paper transfer unit (IPTU)...............................................................................................472
Front cover and front door..................................................................................................472
IPTU rear cover...................................................................................................................475
Connector cover assembly.................................................................................................476
IPTU driver PCB.................................................................................................................477
IPTU driver motors..............................................................................................................478
7 Troubleshooting
Introduction..........................................................................................................................................482
Troubleshooting process.....................................................................................................................483
Initial troubleshooting checklist...........................................................................................483
Troubleshooting checklist..................................................................................483
Troubleshooting flowchart...................................................................................................485
Power-on checks................................................................................................................487
Power-on troubleshooting overview...................................................................487
Control panel messages......................................................................................................................488
Using the MFP help system................................................................................................488
Resolving control panel messages.....................................................................................488
Accessory lights for the 3-bin mailbox and stapler/stacker.................................................................531
Accessory lights..................................................................................................................531
Formatter lights....................................................................................................................................532
HP Jetdirect LEDs...............................................................................................................532
Heartbeat LED....................................................................................................................532
Fax LED..............................................................................................................................533
Replacement parts configuration.........................................................................................................534
Formatter and DC controller ..............................................................................................534
Formatter (new or previously installed in another MFP) ....................................................534
DC controller (new or previously installed in another MFP) ..............................................534
xiv
ENWW
Paper path troubleshooting.................................................................................................................536
Jam locations......................................................................................................................536
Paper jam recovery.............................................................................................................538
To disable paper jam recovery...........................................................................539
Clearing jams in the right covers........................................................................................539
Jam in Tray 1......................................................................................................................544
Jam in Tray 2, 3, or 4..........................................................................................................545
Jam in the stapler/stacker...................................................................................................547
Staple jams.........................................................................................................................548
Jam in the 3-bin mailbox.....................................................................................................550
Other jams in the output accessory bridge.........................................................................552
Jam in the ADF...................................................................................................................553
Solving repeated jams........................................................................................................555
Persistent jams...................................................................................................................556
Basic troubleshooting for jams...........................................................................556
Data collection....................................................................................................556
General paper path troubleshooting..................................................................556
Paper path checklist...........................................................................................557
Jams in Tray 1....................................................................................................557
Jams in tray 2.....................................................................................................558
Jams in Tray 3....................................................................................................559
Jams in Tray 4....................................................................................................560
Jams in the paper path.......................................................................................560
Jams in the right upper cover.............................................................................561
Jams in the duplex path.....................................................................................562
Jams in the ADF.................................................................................................................562
Jams in the IPTU................................................................................................................563
Jams in the stapler/stacker.................................................................................................563
Jams in the 3-bin mailbox...................................................................................................564
Using the paper path test....................................................................................................565
Using the scanner tests......................................................................................................565
Correcting print quality and copy quality problems.............................................................................566
Print quality problems associated with media.....................................................................566
Overhead transparency defects..........................................................................................566
Print quality problems associated with the environment....................................................567
Print quality problems associated with jams.......................................................................567
Understanding color variations...........................................................................................567
Common causes of color variation.....................................................................567
Using color..........................................................................................................................568
HP ImageREt 3600............................................................................................568
Paper selection..................................................................................................568
sRGB..................................................................................................................568
Color options.......................................................................................................................569
Restricting color printing.....................................................................................569
Print in grayscale................................................................................................569
Automatic or manual color adjustment..............................................................570
Manual color options..........................................................................................570
Halftone options.................................................................................................570
Neutral grays......................................................................................................570
Edge control.......................................................................................................570
ENWW
xv
RGB color...........................................................................................................571
Adjusting color balance.......................................................................................................571
To adjust color balance......................................................................................571
Color selection process......................................................................................................572
Matching colors...................................................................................................................572
PANTONE® color matching...............................................................................572
Swatch book color matching..............................................................................572
Print quality troubleshooting pages....................................................................................572
Print quality troubleshooting tool.........................................................................................573
Image defects.....................................................................................................................573
Light image.........................................................................................................574
Light color...........................................................................................................575
Dark image.........................................................................................................575
Dark color...........................................................................................................576
Completely blank image.....................................................................................576
All black or solid color........................................................................................576
Dots in vertical lines...........................................................................................577
Dirt on the back of the paper..............................................................................577
Dirt on the front of the paper..............................................................................578
Vertical lines.......................................................................................................579
White vertical lines.............................................................................................579
Horizontal lines...................................................................................................580
White horizontal lines.........................................................................................580
Missing color......................................................................................................580
Blank spots.........................................................................................................581
Poor fusing.........................................................................................................582
Distortion or blurring...........................................................................................582
Smearing............................................................................................................583
Misplaced image................................................................................................584
Repetitive defects troubleshooting.....................................................................584
Repetitive defect ruler........................................................................................585
Image defect examples.......................................................................................................586
Cleaning the scanner glass................................................................................................591
Calibrating the MFP............................................................................................................591
Media transport problems....................................................................................................................593
E-mail problems...................................................................................................................................595
To validate the SMTP gateway address.............................................................................595
To validate the LDAP gateway address.............................................................................595
Fax problems.......................................................................................................................................596
Network connectivity problems............................................................................................................596
Troubleshooting network printing problems........................................................................596
Loopback test......................................................................................................................597
Ping test..............................................................................................................................597
Functional checks................................................................................................................................598
Engine test..........................................................................................................................598
Formatter test......................................................................................................................599
MFP resets..........................................................................................................................................600
Cold reset............................................................................................................................600
NVRAM initialization...........................................................................................................600
Hard-disk initialization.........................................................................................................601
xvi
ENWW
Control panel troubleshooting.............................................................................................................602
Control panel layout............................................................................................................602
Control panel features........................................................................................................603
Home-screen navigation.....................................................................................................604
Help system........................................................................................................................604
What is This? Help.............................................................................................604
Show Me How Help............................................................................................605
Menu map...........................................................................................................................605
Retrieve job menu...............................................................................................................605
Information menu................................................................................................................606
Fax menu............................................................................................................................607
Paper handling menu..........................................................................................................607
Configure device menu.......................................................................................................609
Originals submenu.............................................................................................610
Copying submenu..............................................................................................611
Enhancement submenu.....................................................................................612
Sending submenu..............................................................................................612
Printing submenu...............................................................................................613
PCL submenu....................................................................................................616
Print quality submenu.........................................................................................617
System setup submenu......................................................................................618
Copy/send settings.............................................................................................622
MBM-3 Configuration submenu.........................................................................623
Stapler/stacker submenu...................................................................................624
I/O submenu.......................................................................................................624
Embedded Jetdirect submenu...........................................................................625
Resets submenu................................................................................................628
Diagnostics menu...............................................................................................................629
Tools for troubleshooting.....................................................................................................................633
Using the embedded Web server.......................................................................................633
Opening the embedded Web server..................................................................633
Information tab...................................................................................................634
Settings tab........................................................................................................634
Digital Sending tab.............................................................................................635
Networking tab...................................................................................................635
Other links..........................................................................................................635
Using the HP Easy Printer Care Software..........................................................................636
Supported operating systems............................................................................636
To use the HP Easy Printer Care Software.......................................................636
HP Easy Printer Care Software sections...........................................................637
Using HP Web Jetadmin software......................................................................................639
Information pages...............................................................................................................640
To print an information page..............................................................................640
Menu map..........................................................................................................640
Configuration pages...........................................................................................641
Configuration page............................................................................641
HP embedded Jetdirect page............................................................643
Paper handling configuration page...................................................643
Fax accessory page..........................................................................644
Finding important information on the configuration pages................646
ENWW
xvii
Supplies status page..........................................................................................648
Usage page........................................................................................................650
PCL or PS font list..............................................................................................652
Individual component diagnostics.......................................................................................653
LED diagnostics ................................................................................................653
Engine diagnostics.............................................................................................654
Diagnostics mode..............................................................................654
Diagnostics that put the engine into the special diagnostics mode. .654
Diagnostic tests.................................................................................655
Paper path sensor test.......................................................................................656
Manual sensor test.............................................................................................657
Scanner tests.....................................................................................................659
Component tests................................................................................................659
Service menu......................................................................................................................662
Service ID...........................................................................................................................664
Converting the service ID to an actual date.......................................................664
Troubleshooting the embedded HP Jetdirect print server..................................................665
Firmware-stack trace..........................................................................................................665
Diagrams for troubleshooting..............................................................................................................666
DC controller connections...................................................................................................666
Scanner controller PCB connections..................................................................................669
Locations of major components..........................................................................................670
Sensors and switches........................................................................................672
Sensors and switches.......................................................................672
Motors, fans, and solenoids...............................................................................674
Motors and solenoids........................................................................674
Fans...................................................................................................677
PCBs..................................................................................................678
Scanner and ADF components..........................................................................679
ADF and scanner sensors.................................................................679
ADF pickup assembly sensors..........................................................680
ADF motors, fans, and solenoids......................................................680
2 X 500-sheet feeder..........................................................................................682
IPTU...................................................................................................................683
General timing chart............................................................................................................684
General circuit diagrams.....................................................................................................685
8 Parts and diagrams
Introduction..........................................................................................................................................700
Ordering parts and supplies................................................................................................................701
Parts that wear....................................................................................................................701
Parts....................................................................................................................................701
Customer support...............................................................................................................701
Supplies and accessories...................................................................................................701
Assembly locations..............................................................................................................................706
Major components..............................................................................................................706
External covers and panels.................................................................................................................710
Internal components............................................................................................................................722
ADF components.................................................................................................................................766
Scanner components...........................................................................................................................788
xviii
ENWW
2 X 500-sheet feeder components......................................................................................................810
Optional devices..................................................................................................................................830
Stapler/stacker....................................................................................................................830
3-bin mailbox.......................................................................................................................832
Intermediate paper transfer unit (IPTU)..............................................................................834
Alphabetical parts list...........................................................................................................................840
Numerical parts list..............................................................................................................................854
Index....................................................................................................................................................................869
ENWW
xix
xx
ENWW
List of tables
Table 1-1
Table 1-2
Table 1-3
Table 1-4
Table 1-5
Table 1-6
Table 1-7
Table 1-8
Table 1-9
Table 1-10
Table 1-11
Table 1-12
Table 1-13
Table 1-14
Table 1-15
Table 3-1
Table 3-2
Table 3-3
Table 3-4
Table 5-1
Table 5-2
Table 5-3
Table 5-4
Table 5-5
Table 5-6
Table 5-7
Table 6-1
Table 7-1
Table 7-2
Table 7-3
Table 7-4
Table 7-5
Table 7-6
Table 7-7
Table 7-8
Table 7-9
Table 7-10
Table 7-11
Table 7-12
Table 7-13
ENWW
Parts compatibility..........................................................................................................................13
Product dimensions........................................................................................................................15
Product dimensions........................................................................................................................15
Environmental specifications..........................................................................................................15
Power requirements.......................................................................................................................16
Power consumption (average, in watts).........................................................................................16
Sound power and pressure level (Product Name: X)....................................................................17
Supported types of media..............................................................................................................22
Tray 1 media sizes.........................................................................................................................22
Tray 2, 3, and 4 media sizes..........................................................................................................23
Automatic duplex printing (two-sided printing)...............................................................................24
Optional 3-bin mailbox or stacker part of the stapler/stacker supported sizes..............................24
Stapler part of the optional stapler/stacker supported sizes..........................................................26
Supported heavy paper types........................................................................................................29
Weight equivalence table...............................................................................................................30
HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp installation.........................................................................................52
Supported printer drivers................................................................................................................79
Gaining access to Windows printer drivers....................................................................................81
Gaining access to Macintosh printer drivers..................................................................................82
Basic operation sequence............................................................................................................147
Function of motors, fans, and environment sensor......................................................................157
Fuser temperatures......................................................................................................................162
Calibration timing and duration....................................................................................................191
Cleaning timing and duration.......................................................................................................191
Paper tray media size detection...................................................................................................203
Paper size detection switch settings............................................................................................209
Common fasteners used in this MFP...........................................................................................246
Troubleshooting flowchart............................................................................................................485
Error messages and associated jam locations............................................................................537
Causes for jams in Tray 1............................................................................................................557
Causes for jams in Tray 2............................................................................................................558
Causes for jams in Tray 3............................................................................................................559
Causes for jams in Tray 4............................................................................................................560
Causes for jams in the paper path...............................................................................................560
Causes for jams in the right upper cover.....................................................................................561
Causes for jams in the duplex path..............................................................................................562
Causes of jams in the ADF..........................................................................................................562
Causes for jams in the IPTU........................................................................................................563
Causes for jams in the stapler/stacker.........................................................................................563
Causes for jams in the 3-bin mailbox...........................................................................................564
xxi
Table 7-14
Table 7-15
Table 7-16
Table 7-17
Table 7-18
Table 7-19
Table 7-20
Table 7-21
Table 7-22
Table 7-23
Table 7-24
Table 7-25
Table 7-26
Table 7-27
Table 7-28
Table 7-29
Table 7-30
Table 7-31
Table 7-32
Table 7-33
Table 7-34
Table 7-35
Table 7-36
Table 7-37
Table 7-38
Table 7-39
Table 8-1
Table 8-2
Table 8-3
Table 8-4
Table 8-5
Table 8-6
Table 8-7
Table 8-8
Table 8-9
Table 8-10
Table 8-11
Table 8-12
Table 8-13
Table 8-14
Table 8-15
Table 8-16
Table 8-17
Table 8-18
Table 8-19
Table 8-20
Table 8-21
Table 8-22
Table 8-23
Table 8-24
xxii
Image defects...............................................................................................................................573
Causes for light images................................................................................................................574
Causes for light color....................................................................................................................575
Causes for dark images...............................................................................................................575
Causes for dark colors.................................................................................................................576
Causes for a completely blank image..........................................................................................576
Causes for an all black or solid colored image............................................................................577
Causes for vertical lines of white dots..........................................................................................577
Causes for dirt on the back of the paper......................................................................................578
Causes for dirt on the front of the paper......................................................................................578
Causes for vertical lines...............................................................................................................579
Causes for white vertical lines......................................................................................................579
Causes for horizontal lines...........................................................................................................580
Causes for white horizontal lines.................................................................................................580
Causes for a missing color...........................................................................................................580
Causes for blank spots.................................................................................................................581
Causes for poor fusing.................................................................................................................582
Causes for distortion or blurring...................................................................................................582
Causes for smearing....................................................................................................................583
Causes for misplaced image........................................................................................................584
Defects that can occur during printing.........................................................................................586
Defects that can occur when using the ADF................................................................................590
Important information on the configuration pages.......................................................................646
Tray 2 paper size codes...............................................................................................................656
Manual sensor test letter designations........................................................................................657
Service menu...............................................................................................................................662
Technical support Web sites and related documentation............................................................701
Supplies and accessories............................................................................................................701
Major components........................................................................................................................707
External covers and panels..........................................................................................................711
Right lower cover assembly.........................................................................................................713
Multipurpose tray assembly.........................................................................................................715
Right upper door assembly..........................................................................................................717
Left cover assembly.....................................................................................................................719
Face-down tray assembly............................................................................................................721
Internal components (1 of 8)........................................................................................................723
Internal components (2 of 8)........................................................................................................725
Internal components (3 of 8)........................................................................................................727
Internal components (4 of 8)........................................................................................................729
Internal components (5 of 8)........................................................................................................731
Internal components (6 of 8)........................................................................................................733
Internal components (7 of 8)........................................................................................................735
Internal components (8 of 8)........................................................................................................737
Paper pickup drive assembly.......................................................................................................739
Pickup motor assembly................................................................................................................741
Disengaging drive assembly........................................................................................................743
Lifter drive assembly....................................................................................................................745
Cassette.......................................................................................................................................747
Multipurpose pickup assembly.....................................................................................................749
ETB assembly..............................................................................................................................751
ENWW
Table 8-25
Table 8-26
Table 8-27
Table 8-28
Table 8-29
Table 8-30
Table 8-31
Table 8-32
Table 8-33
Table 8-34
Table 8-35
Table 8-36
Table 8-37
Table 8-38
Table 8-39
Table 8-40
Table 8-41
Table 8-42
Table 8-43
Table 8-44
Table 8-45
Table 8-46
Table 8-47
Table 8-48
Table 8-49
Table 8-50
Table 8-51
Table 8-52
Table 8-53
Table 8-54
Table 8-55
Table 8-56
Table 8-57
Table 8-58
Table 8-59
Table 8-60
Table 8-61
Table 8-62
Table 8-63
Table 8-64
Table 8-65
Table 8-66
Table 8-67
Table 8-68
Table 8-69
ENWW
Delivery assembly........................................................................................................................753
Fuser drive assembly...................................................................................................................755
Duplexing unit (1 of 2)..................................................................................................................757
Duplexing unit (2 of 2)..................................................................................................................759
Duplex feed assembly..................................................................................................................761
Fuser assembly............................................................................................................................763
PCB assembly..............................................................................................................................765
ADF assembly..............................................................................................................................767
ADF internal components (1 of 3)................................................................................................769
ADF internal components (2 of 3)................................................................................................771
ADF internal components (3 of 3)................................................................................................773
ADF input tray..............................................................................................................................775
ADF separation pad.....................................................................................................................777
ADF separation pad case.............................................................................................................779
ADF pickup-roller assembly.........................................................................................................781
ADF pickup-roller cover................................................................................................................783
ADF mylar holder assembly.........................................................................................................785
ADF mylar replacement kit...........................................................................................................787
Scanner glass and cover..............................................................................................................789
Scanner base components..........................................................................................................791
Scanner flatbed unit assembly.....................................................................................................793
Scanner covers............................................................................................................................795
Scanner carriage lock assembly..................................................................................................797
Scanner-open sensor assembly...................................................................................................799
Scanner motor fan........................................................................................................................801
Scanner motor..............................................................................................................................803
Scanner belt and pulley assembly...............................................................................................805
Scanner slide rail..........................................................................................................................807
Scanner optical assembly............................................................................................................809
2 X 500-sheet feeder external components.................................................................................813
2 X 500-sheet paper feeder internal components (1 of 2)...........................................................815
2 X 500-sheet paper feeder internal components (2 of 2)...........................................................817
500-sheet feeder lifter drive assembly.........................................................................................819
Upper paper pickup drive assembly.............................................................................................821
Lower paper pickup drive assembly.............................................................................................823
2 X 500-sheet paper feeder cassette...........................................................................................825
Upper paper pickup assembly......................................................................................................827
Lower paper pickup assembly......................................................................................................829
Stapler/stacker accessory............................................................................................................831
3-bin mailbox accessory...............................................................................................................833
External covers and panels..........................................................................................................835
Internal components (1 of 2)........................................................................................................837
Internal components (2 of 2)........................................................................................................839
Alphabetical parts list...................................................................................................................840
Numerical parts list.......................................................................................................................854
xxiii
xxiv
ENWW
List of figures
Figure 4-1
Figure 4-2
Figure 4-3
Figure 5-1
Figure 5-2
Figure 5-3
Figure 5-4
Figure 5-5
Figure 5-6
Figure 5-7
Figure 5-8
Figure 5-9
Figure 5-10
Figure 5-11
Figure 5-12
Figure 5-13
Figure 5-14
Figure 5-15
Figure 5-16
Figure 5-17
Figure 5-18
Figure 5-19
Figure 5-20
Figure 5-21
Figure 5-22
Figure 5-23
Figure 5-24
Figure 5-25
Figure 5-26
Figure 5-27
Figure 5-28
Figure 5-29
Figure 5-30
Figure 5-31
Figure 5-32
Figure 5-33
Figure 5-34
Figure 5-35
Figure 5-36
Figure 5-37
ENWW
ETB total page count according to average job length................................................................115
Supply item locations...................................................................................................................117
Supplies replacement clearance diagram....................................................................................118
Basic system operation................................................................................................................146
Power on sequence......................................................................................................................149
Formatter system.........................................................................................................................150
Engine control system..................................................................................................................154
DC controller PCB........................................................................................................................155
Motors and fans............................................................................................................................157
Low-voltage power supply circuits...............................................................................................161
Fuser power supply circuit...........................................................................................................161
Low-voltage power supply circuit.................................................................................................163
Heater temperature control circuit................................................................................................165
High-voltage power supply block diagram...................................................................................169
Video interface control..................................................................................................................171
Laser/scanner assembly..............................................................................................................173
Laser control circuit block diagram...............................................................................................175
Scanner motor circuit diagram.....................................................................................................176
Image formation system...............................................................................................................177
Image formation process..............................................................................................................179
Electrostatic latent image formation block...................................................................................180
Pre-exposure................................................................................................................................180
Laser beam exposure...................................................................................................................181
Attaching the media to the ETB...................................................................................................182
Toner transfer...............................................................................................................................183
Separation....................................................................................................................................183
Fusing...........................................................................................................................................184
Print cartridge...............................................................................................................................185
Memory tag...................................................................................................................................186
Photosensitive drum detection.....................................................................................................187
ETB...............................................................................................................................................188
Transfer roller engagement/disengagement control....................................................................190
ETB cleaning................................................................................................................................192
Color misregistration detection.....................................................................................................194
Image stabilization control............................................................................................................195
Image density detection...............................................................................................................197
Pickup/feed system (1 of 2)..........................................................................................................199
Pickup/feed system (2 of 2)..........................................................................................................201
Pickup/feed system......................................................................................................................202
Cassette pickup............................................................................................................................204
xxv
Figure 5-38
Figure 5-39
Figure 5-40
Figure 5-41
Figure 5-42
Figure 5-43
Figure 5-44
Figure 5-45
Figure 5-46
Figure 5-47
Figure 5-48
Figure 5-49
Figure 5-50
Figure 5-51
Figure 5-52
Figure 5-53
Figure 5-54
Figure 5-55
Figure 5-56
Figure 5-57
Figure 5-58
Figure 5-59
Figure 5-60
Figure 5-61
Figure 5-62
Figure 5-63
Figure 6-1
Figure 6-2
Figure 6-3
Figure 6-4
Figure 6-5
Figure 6-6
Figure 6-7
Figure 6-8
Figure 6-9
Figure 6-10
Figure 6-11
Figure 6-12
Figure 6-13
Figure 6-14
Figure 6-15
Figure 6-16
Figure 6-17
Figure 6-18
Figure 6-19
Figure 6-20
Figure 6-21
Figure 6-22
Figure 6-23
Figure 6-24
xxvi
Media lifting..................................................................................................................................206
Media lifting..................................................................................................................................207
Skew correction............................................................................................................................208
Media detection............................................................................................................................209
Loop control..................................................................................................................................212
Fusing pressure release...............................................................................................................213
Duplex feed unit...........................................................................................................................214
Duplexing driver PCB signal flow.................................................................................................214
Duplexing feed.............................................................................................................................215
Paper skew correction..................................................................................................................216
ADF mechanical structure............................................................................................................219
Scanner assembly electrical structure.........................................................................................220
Scan carriage components..........................................................................................................221
Scan carriage movement.............................................................................................................222
ADF paper path and sensors.......................................................................................................223
2 X 500-sheet feeder paper path.................................................................................................225
2 X 500-sheet feeder I/O block diagram......................................................................................226
2 X 500-sheet feeder pickup and feed diagram...........................................................................227
IPTU paper path...........................................................................................................................229
IPTU PCB flow.............................................................................................................................230
IPTU transfer operation................................................................................................................231
3-bin mailbox operation................................................................................................................233
Media flow when using the stacker mode....................................................................................234
Stapler/stacker operation.............................................................................................................236
Jogger operation (top view)..........................................................................................................237
Stapler unit operation...................................................................................................................239
Removal and replacement sequencing tree diagram..................................................................244
Remove the print cartridges (1 of 3).............................................................................................248
Remove the print cartridges (2 of 3).............................................................................................249
Remove the print cartridges (3 of 3).............................................................................................249
Remove the control panel overlays..............................................................................................250
Remove the control panel (1 of 3)................................................................................................250
Remove the control panel (2 of 3)................................................................................................251
Remove the control panel (3 of 3)................................................................................................251
Remove the IPTU (1 of 3)............................................................................................................252
Remove the IPTU (2 of 3)............................................................................................................252
Remove the IPTU (3 of 3)............................................................................................................253
Remove the stapler/stacker (1 of 5).............................................................................................253
Remove the stapler/stacker (2 of 5).............................................................................................254
Remove the stapler/stacker (3 of 5).............................................................................................254
Remove the stapler/stacker (4 of 5).............................................................................................255
Remove the stapler/stacker (5 of 5).............................................................................................255
Replace the staple cartridge (1 of 3)............................................................................................256
Replace the staple cartridge (2 of 3)............................................................................................256
Replace the staple cartridge (3 of 3)............................................................................................257
Remove the 3-bin mailbox (1 of 3)...............................................................................................257
Remove the 3-bin mailbox (2 of 3)...............................................................................................258
Remove the 3-bin mailbox (3 of 3)...............................................................................................258
Remove the ETB assembly (1 of 4).............................................................................................259
Remove the ETB assembly (2 of 4).............................................................................................259
ENWW
Figure 6-25
Figure 6-26
Figure 6-27
Figure 6-28
Figure 6-29
Figure 6-30
Figure 6-31
Figure 6-32
Figure 6-33
Figure 6-34
Figure 6-35
Figure 6-36
Figure 6-37
Figure 6-38
Figure 6-39
Figure 6-40
Figure 6-41
Figure 6-42
Figure 6-43
Figure 6-44
Figure 6-45
Figure 6-46
Figure 6-47
Figure 6-48
Figure 6-49
Figure 6-50
Figure 6-51
Figure 6-52
Figure 6-53
Figure 6-54
Figure 6-55
Figure 6-56
Figure 6-57
Figure 6-58
Figure 6-59
Figure 6-60
Figure 6-61
Figure 6-62
Figure 6-63
Figure 6-64
Figure 6-65
Figure 6-66
Figure 6-67
Figure 6-68
Figure 6-69
Figure 6-70
Figure 6-71
Figure 6-72
Figure 6-73
Figure 6-74
ENWW
Remove the ETB assembly (3 of 4) — right lever.......................................................................260
Remove the ETB assembly (4 of 4) — left lever..........................................................................260
Remove the MP tray pickup assembly (1 of 2)............................................................................261
Remove the MP tray pickup assembly (2 of 2)............................................................................261
Remove the ADF input tray (1 of 3).............................................................................................262
Remove the ADF input tray (2 of 3).............................................................................................262
Remove the ADF input tray (3 of 3).............................................................................................263
Remove the ADF pickup and feed rollers (1 of 3)........................................................................264
Remove the ADF pickup and feed rollers (2 of 3)........................................................................264
Remove the ADF pickup and feed rollers (3 of 3)........................................................................265
Remove the ADF separation pad (1 of 4)....................................................................................266
Remove the ADF separation pad (2 of 4)....................................................................................266
Remove the ADF separation pad (3 of 4)....................................................................................267
Remove the ADF separation pad (4 of 4)....................................................................................267
Remove the ADF delivery guide (1 of 3)......................................................................................268
Remove the ADF delivery guide (2 of 3)......................................................................................268
Remove the ADF delivery guide (3 of 3)......................................................................................269
Reinstall the clear mylar sheet.....................................................................................................269
Remove the face-down tray assembly.........................................................................................270
Remove the fuser (1 of 2)............................................................................................................271
Remove the fuser (2 of 2)............................................................................................................271
Remove the tray 2, 3, or 4 pickup and feed rollers (1 of 2)..........................................................272
Remove the tray 2, 3, or 4 pickup and feed rollers (2 of 2)..........................................................272
Remove the MP tray pickup roller (1 of 3)...................................................................................273
Remove the MP tray pickup roller (2 of 3)...................................................................................273
Remove the MP tray pickup roller (3 of 3)...................................................................................274
Replace the MP tray pickup roller................................................................................................274
Replace the tray cover.................................................................................................................275
Remove the tray 2 separation roller (1 of 3)................................................................................275
Remove the tray 2 separation roller (2 of 3)................................................................................276
Remove the tray 2 separation roller (3 of 3)................................................................................276
Remove the tray 3 or 4 separation rollers (1 of 2).......................................................................277
Remove the tray 3 or 4 separation rollers (2 of 2).......................................................................277
Remove the scanner filter (1 of 2)................................................................................................278
Remove the scanner filter (2 of 2)................................................................................................278
Remove the ADF hinge flap.........................................................................................................279
Remove the formatter (1 of 2)......................................................................................................281
Remove the formatter (2 of 2)......................................................................................................281
Remove the hard drive (1 of 2)....................................................................................................283
Remove the hard drive (2 of 2)....................................................................................................283
Remove the DIMM (2 of 3)...........................................................................................................284
Remove the DIMM (3 of 3)...........................................................................................................284
Remove the DIMM (4 of 5)...........................................................................................................285
Remove the flash memory card (1 of 2).......................................................................................287
Remove the flash memory card (2 of 2).......................................................................................287
Remove the fax accessory (1 of 5)..............................................................................................288
Remove the fax accessory (2 of 5)..............................................................................................288
Remove the fax accessory (3 of 5)..............................................................................................289
Remove the fax accessory (4 of 5)..............................................................................................289
Remove the fax accessory (5 of 5)..............................................................................................290
xxvii
Figure 6-75
Figure 6-76
Figure 6-77
Figure 6-78
Figure 6-79
Figure 6-80
Figure 6-81
Figure 6-82
Figure 6-83
Figure 6-84
Figure 6-85
Figure 6-86
Figure 6-87
Figure 6-88
Figure 6-89
Figure 6-90
Figure 6-91
Figure 6-92
Figure 6-93
Figure 6-94
Figure 6-95
Figure 6-96
Figure 6-97
Figure 6-98
Figure 6-99
Figure 6-100
Figure 6-101
Figure 6-102
Figure 6-103
Figure 6-104
Figure 6-105
Figure 6-106
Figure 6-107
Figure 6-108
Figure 6-109
Figure 6-110
Figure 6-111
Figure 6-112
Figure 6-113
Figure 6-114
Figure 6-115
Figure 6-116
Figure 6-117
Figure 6-118
Figure 6-119
Figure 6-120
Figure 6-121
Figure 6-122
Figure 6-123
Figure 6-124
xxviii
Cover, door, and panel locations (1 of 2).....................................................................................291
Cover, door, and panel locations (2 of 2).....................................................................................292
Remove the face-down tray assembly.........................................................................................293
Remove the delivery cover assembly..........................................................................................293
Remove the rear cover assembly (1 of 4)....................................................................................294
Remove the rear cover assembly (2 of 4)....................................................................................294
Remove the rear cover assembly (3 of 4)....................................................................................295
Remove the rear cover assembly (4 of 4)....................................................................................295
Remove the left cover..................................................................................................................296
Remove the front cover (1 of 5)...................................................................................................297
Remove the front cover (2 of 5)...................................................................................................298
Remove the front cover (3 of 5)...................................................................................................298
Remove the front cover (4 of 5)...................................................................................................299
Remove the front cover (5 of 5)...................................................................................................299
Remove tray 1 (1 of 7)..................................................................................................................300
Remove tray 1 (2 of 7)..................................................................................................................300
Remove tray 1 (3 of 7)..................................................................................................................301
Remove tray 1 (4 of 7)..................................................................................................................301
Remove tray 1 (5 of 7)..................................................................................................................302
Remove tray 1 (6 of 7)..................................................................................................................302
Remove tray 1 (7 of 7)..................................................................................................................303
Remove the right lower cover assembly (1 of 5)..........................................................................303
Remove the right lower cover assembly (2 of 5)..........................................................................304
Remove the right lower cover assembly (3 of 5)..........................................................................304
Remove the right lower cover assembly (4 of 5)..........................................................................305
Remove the right lower cover assembly (5 of 5)..........................................................................305
Remove the delivery upper cover assembly................................................................................306
Remove the right front lower inner cover.....................................................................................307
Remove the left rear inner cover..................................................................................................308
Remove the right front inner cover assembly (1 of 3)..................................................................309
Remove the right front inner cover assembly (2 of 3)..................................................................309
Remove the right front inner cover assembly (3 of 3)..................................................................310
Remove the right rear inner cover assembly (1 of 4)...................................................................310
Remove the right rear inner cover assembly (2 of 4)...................................................................311
Remove the right rear inner cover assembly (3 of 4)...................................................................311
Remove the right rear inner cover assembly (4 of 4)...................................................................312
Locations of main assemblies (1 of 3).........................................................................................313
Locations of main assemblies (2 of 3).........................................................................................314
Locations of main assemblies (3 of 3).........................................................................................315
Paper feed assembly sensor........................................................................................................316
Remove the paper feed assembly (1 of 6)...................................................................................317
Remove the paper feed assembly (2 of 6)...................................................................................317
Remove the paper feed assembly (3 of 6)...................................................................................318
Remove the paper feed assembly (4 of 6)...................................................................................318
Remove the paper feed assembly (5 of 6)...................................................................................319
Remove the paper feed assembly (6 of 6)...................................................................................319
Remove the pickup drive assembly (1 of 2).................................................................................320
Remove the pickup drive assembly (2 of 2).................................................................................320
Remove the lifter drive assembly (1 of 3)....................................................................................321
Remove the lifter drive assembly (2 of 3)....................................................................................321
ENWW
Figure 6-125
Figure 6-126
Figure 6-127
Figure 6-128
Figure 6-129
Figure 6-130
Figure 6-131
Figure 6-132
Figure 6-133
Figure 6-134
Figure 6-135
Figure 6-136
Figure 6-137
Figure 6-138
Figure 6-139
Figure 6-140
Figure 6-141
Figure 6-142
Figure 6-143
Figure 6-144
Figure 6-145
Figure 6-146
Figure 6-147
Figure 6-148
Figure 6-149
Figure 6-150
Figure 6-151
Figure 6-152
Figure 6-153
Figure 6-154
Figure 6-155
Figure 6-156
Figure 6-157
Figure 6-158
Figure 6-159
Figure 6-160
Figure 6-161
Figure 6-162
Figure 6-163
Figure 6-164
Figure 6-165
Figure 6-166
Figure 6-167
Figure 6-168
Figure 6-169
Figure 6-170
Figure 6-171
Figure 6-172
Figure 6-173
Figure 6-174
ENWW
Remove the lifter drive assembly (3 of 3)....................................................................................322
Remove the disengaging drive assembly (1 of 3)........................................................................323
Remove the disengaging drive assembly (2 of 3)........................................................................324
Remove the disengaging drive assembly (3 of 3)........................................................................324
Remove the main drive assembly (1 of 9)...................................................................................325
Remove the main drive assembly (2 of 9)...................................................................................326
Remove the main drive assembly (3 of 9)...................................................................................326
Remove the main drive assembly (4 of 9)...................................................................................327
Remove the main drive assembly (5 of 9)...................................................................................327
Remove the main drive assembly (6 of 9)...................................................................................328
Remove the main drive assembly (7 of 9)...................................................................................328
Remove the main drive assembly (8 of 9)...................................................................................329
Remove the main drive assembly (9 of 9)...................................................................................329
Reinstallation tips (1 of 5).............................................................................................................330
Reinstallation tips (2 of 5).............................................................................................................331
Reinstallation tips (3 of 5).............................................................................................................331
Reinstallation tips (4 of 5).............................................................................................................332
Reinstallation tips (5 of 5).............................................................................................................333
Remove the rail holder assembly (1 of 3)....................................................................................334
Remove the rail holder assembly (2 of 3)....................................................................................334
Remove the rail holder assembly (3 of 3)....................................................................................335
Remove the rail guide assembly (1 of 7).....................................................................................335
Remove the rail guide assembly (2 of 7).....................................................................................336
Remove the rail guide assembly (3 of 7).....................................................................................336
Remove the rail guide assembly (4 of 7).....................................................................................337
Remove the rail guide assembly, connector cover claw detail (5 of 7)........................................337
Remove the rail guide assembly (6 of 7).....................................................................................338
Remove the rail guide assembly (7 of 7).....................................................................................338
Remove the formatter case (2 of 10)...........................................................................................339
Remove the formatter case (3 of 10)...........................................................................................339
Remove the formatter case (4 of 10)...........................................................................................340
Remove the formatter case (5 of 10)...........................................................................................340
Remove the formatter case (6 of 10)...........................................................................................341
Remove the formatter case (7 of 10)...........................................................................................341
Remove the formatter case (8 of 10)...........................................................................................342
Remove the formatter case (9 of 10)...........................................................................................342
Remove the formatter case (10 of 10).........................................................................................343
Remove screws at corners of MFP..............................................................................................344
Remove laser/scanner components (1 of 12)..............................................................................345
Remove the laser/scanner components (2 of 12)........................................................................345
Remove the laser/scanner components (3 of 12)........................................................................346
Remove the laser/scanner components (4 of 12)........................................................................346
Remove the laser/scanner components (5 of 12)........................................................................347
Remove the laser/scanner components (6 of 12)........................................................................347
Remove the laser/scanner components (7 of 12)........................................................................348
Remove the laser/scanner components (8 of 12)........................................................................348
Remove the laser/scanner components (9 of 12)........................................................................349
Remove the laser/scanner components (10 of 12)......................................................................349
Remove the laser/scanner components (11 of 12)......................................................................350
Remove laser/scanner components (12 of 12)............................................................................350
xxix
Figure 6-175
Figure 6-176
Figure 6-177
Figure 6-178
Figure 6-179
Figure 6-180
Figure 6-181
Figure 6-182
Figure 6-183
Figure 6-184
Figure 6-185
Figure 6-186
Figure 6-187
Figure 6-188
Figure 6-189
Figure 6-190
Figure 6-191
Figure 6-192
Figure 6-193
Figure 6-194
Figure 6-195
Figure 6-196
Figure 6-197
Figure 6-198
Figure 6-199
Figure 6-200
Figure 6-201
Figure 6-202
Figure 6-203
Figure 6-204
Figure 6-205
Figure 6-206
Figure 6-207
Figure 6-208
Figure 6-209
Figure 6-210
Figure 6-211
Figure 6-212
Figure 6-213
Figure 6-214
Figure 6-215
Figure 6-216
Figure 6-217
Figure 6-218
Figure 6-219
Figure 6-220
Figure 6-221
Figure 6-222
Figure 6-223
Figure 6-224
xxx
Remove the duplexing assembly (1 of 5).....................................................................................351
Remove the duplexing assembly (2 of 5).....................................................................................352
Remove the duplexing assembly (3 of 5).....................................................................................352
Remove the duplexing assembly (4 of 5).....................................................................................353
Remove the duplexing assembly (5 of 5).....................................................................................353
Remove the delivery assembly (1 of 15)......................................................................................354
Remove the delivery assembly (2 of 15)......................................................................................354
Remove the delivery assembly (3 of 15)......................................................................................355
Remove the delivery assembly (4 of 15)......................................................................................355
Remove the delivery assembly (5 of 15)......................................................................................356
Remove the delivery assembly (6 of 15)......................................................................................356
Remove the delivery assembly (7 of 15)......................................................................................357
Remove the delivery assembly (8 of 15)......................................................................................357
Remove the delivery assembly (9 of 15)......................................................................................358
Remove the delivery assembly (10 of 15)....................................................................................358
Remove the delivery assembly (11 of 15)....................................................................................359
Remove the delivery assembly (12 of 15)....................................................................................359
Remove the delivery assembly (13 of 15)....................................................................................360
Remove the delivery assembly (14 of 15)....................................................................................360
Remove the delivery assembly (15 of 15)....................................................................................361
Remove the fuser drive assembly................................................................................................361
Remove drum motor.....................................................................................................................362
Remove the fuser motor (1 of 2)..................................................................................................363
Remove the fuser motor (2 of 2)..................................................................................................363
Remove the fuser pressure release motor (1 of 8)......................................................................364
Remove the fuser pressure release motor (2 of 8)......................................................................365
Remove the fuser pressure release motor (3 of 8)......................................................................365
Remove the fuser pressure release motor (4 of 8)......................................................................366
Remove the fuser pressure release motor, connector cover claw detail (5 of 8)........................366
Remove the fuser pressure release motor (6 of 8)......................................................................367
Remove the fuser pressure release motor (7 of 8)......................................................................367
Remove the fuser pressure release motor (8 of 8)......................................................................368
Remove the developing disengaging motor.................................................................................369
Remove the pickup motor assembly (1 of 3)...............................................................................370
Remove the pickup motor assembly (2 of 3)...............................................................................370
Remove the pickup motor assembly (3 of 3)...............................................................................371
Remove the power supply fan (1 of 2).........................................................................................371
Remove the power supply fan (2 of 2).........................................................................................372
Reinstall the power supply fan.....................................................................................................372
Remove the cartridge fan.............................................................................................................373
Installation guidelines...................................................................................................................374
Remove the sub power supply fan (1 of 3)..................................................................................374
Remove the sub power supply fan (2 of 3)..................................................................................375
Remove the sub power supply fan (3 of 3)..................................................................................375
Installation guidelines...................................................................................................................376
Remove the delivery fan (1 of 2)..................................................................................................376
Remove the delivery fan (2 of 2)..................................................................................................377
Remove control fan #1.................................................................................................................377
Installation guidelines...................................................................................................................378
Remove control fan #2.................................................................................................................378
ENWW
Figure 6-225
Figure 6-226
Figure 6-227
Figure 6-228
Figure 6-229
Figure 6-230
Figure 6-231
Figure 6-232
Figure 6-233
Figure 6-234
Figure 6-235
Figure 6-236
Figure 6-237
Figure 6-238
Figure 6-239
Figure 6-240
Figure 6-241
Figure 6-242
Figure 6-243
Figure 6-244
Figure 6-245
Figure 6-246
Figure 6-247
Figure 6-248
Figure 6-249
Figure 6-250
Figure 6-251
Figure 6-252
Figure 6-253
Figure 6-254
Figure 6-255
Figure 6-256
Figure 6-257
Figure 6-258
Figure 6-259
Figure 6-260
Figure 6-261
Figure 6-262
Figure 6-263
Figure 6-264
Figure 6-265
Figure 6-266
Figure 6-267
Figure 6-268
Figure 6-269
Figure 6-270
Figure 6-271
Figure 6-272
Figure 6-273
Figure 6-274
ENWW
Installation guidelines...................................................................................................................379
Remove the rear exhaust fan (1 of 2)..........................................................................................379
Remove the rear exhaust fan (2 of 2)..........................................................................................380
Installation guidelines...................................................................................................................380
Remove the ETB fan (1 of 4).......................................................................................................381
Remove the ETB fan (2 of 4).......................................................................................................381
Remove the ETB fan (3 of 4).......................................................................................................382
Remove the ETB fan (4 of 4).......................................................................................................382
Installation guidelines...................................................................................................................383
Remove the DC controller (1 of 2)...............................................................................................385
Remove the DC controller (2 of 2)...............................................................................................385
DC controller component connections.........................................................................................386
Remove the toner level PCB........................................................................................................389
Remove the high-voltage power supply PCB (1 of 9)..................................................................390
Remove the high-voltage power supply PCB (2 of 9)..................................................................390
Remove the high-voltage power supply PCB (3 of 9)..................................................................391
Remove the high-voltage power supply PCB (4 of 9)..................................................................391
Remove the high-voltage power supply PCB (5 of 9)..................................................................392
Remove the high-voltage power supply PCB (6 of 9)..................................................................392
Remove the high-voltage power supply PCB (7 of 9)..................................................................393
Remove the high-voltage power supply PCB (8 of 9)..................................................................394
Remove the high-voltage power supply PCB (9 of 9)..................................................................394
Remove the low-voltage power supply PCB (1 of 9)...................................................................395
Remove the low-voltage power supply PCB (2 of 9)...................................................................395
Remove the low-voltage power supply PCB (3 of 9)...................................................................396
Remove the low-voltage power supply PCB (4 of 9)...................................................................396
Remove the low-voltage power supply PCB (5 of 9)...................................................................397
Remove the low-voltage power supply PCB (6 of 9)...................................................................397
Remove the low-voltage power supply PCB (7 of 9)...................................................................398
Remove the low-voltage power supply PCB (8 of 9)...................................................................398
Remove the low-voltage power supply PCB (9 of 9)...................................................................399
Remove the memory controller PCB............................................................................................400
Remove the sub power supply PCB (1 of 4)................................................................................401
Remove the sub power supply PCB (2 of 4)................................................................................401
Remove the sub power supply PCB (3 of 4)................................................................................402
Remove the sub power supply PCB (4 of 4)................................................................................402
Remove the fan drive PCB...........................................................................................................403
Remove the high-voltage contacts...............................................................................................404
Remove the E-label contacts (1 of 2)...........................................................................................405
Remove the E-label contacts (2 of 2)...........................................................................................406
Remove the power switch (1 of 3)................................................................................................406
Remove the power switch (2 of 3)................................................................................................407
Remove the power switch (3 of 3)................................................................................................407
Remove the door-open switch assembly (1 of 3).........................................................................408
Remove the door-open switch assembly (2 of 3).........................................................................408
Remove the door-open switch assembly (3 of 3).........................................................................409
Remove the environment sensor.................................................................................................410
Remove the ADF assembly (1 of 3).............................................................................................411
Remove the ADF assembly (2 of 3).............................................................................................412
Remove the ADF assembly (3 of 3).............................................................................................412
xxxi
Figure 6-275
Figure 6-276
Figure 6-277
Figure 6-278
Figure 6-279
Figure 6-280
Figure 6-281
Figure 6-282
Figure 6-283
Figure 6-284
Figure 6-285
Figure 6-286
Figure 6-287
Figure 6-288
Figure 6-289
Figure 6-290
Figure 6-291
Figure 6-292
Figure 6-293
Figure 6-294
Figure 6-295
Figure 6-296
Figure 6-297
Figure 6-298
Figure 6-299
Figure 6-300
Figure 6-301
Figure 6-302
Figure 6-303
Figure 6-304
Figure 6-305
Figure 6-306
Figure 6-307
Figure 6-308
Figure 6-309
Figure 6-310
Figure 6-311
Figure 6-312
Figure 6-313
Figure 6-314
Figure 6-315
Figure 6-316
Figure 6-317
Figure 6-318
Figure 6-319
Figure 6-320
Figure 6-321
Figure 6-322
Figure 6-323
Figure 6-324
xxxii
Remove the top covers (1 of 2)....................................................................................................413
Remove the top covers (2 of 2)....................................................................................................413
Remove the scanner assembly (1 of 5).......................................................................................414
Remove the scanner assembly (2 of 5).......................................................................................414
Remove the scanner assembly (3 of 5).......................................................................................415
Remove the scanner assembly (4 of 5).......................................................................................415
Remove the scanner assembly (5 of 5).......................................................................................416
Remove the scanner left cover (1 of 2)........................................................................................416
Remove the scanner left cover (2 of 2)........................................................................................417
Remove the scanner right cover (1 of 2)......................................................................................417
Remove the scanner right cover (2 of 2)......................................................................................418
Remove the scanner glass (1 of 2)..............................................................................................418
Remove the optical assembly (1 of 10)........................................................................................419
Remove the optical assembly (2 of 10)........................................................................................420
Remove the optical assembly (3 of 10)........................................................................................421
Remove the optical assembly (4 of 10)........................................................................................421
Remove the optical assembly (5 of 10)........................................................................................422
Remove the optical assembly (6 of 10)........................................................................................422
Remove the optical assembly (7 of 10)........................................................................................423
Remove the optical assembly (8 of 10)........................................................................................423
Remove the optical assembly (9 of 10)........................................................................................424
Remove the optical assembly (10 of 10)......................................................................................424
Remove the scanner bulb (1 of 3)................................................................................................425
Remove the scanner bulb (2 of 3)................................................................................................426
Remove the scanner bulb (3 of 3)................................................................................................426
Remove the inverter PCB............................................................................................................427
Remove the scanner fan..............................................................................................................428
Remove the scanner home position sensor.................................................................................430
Reinstalling the scanner home position sensor...........................................................................430
Remove the scanner controller PCB (1 of 2)...............................................................................431
Remove the scanner controller PCB (2 of 2)...............................................................................431
Remove the ADF output bin extension (1 of 2)............................................................................433
Remove the ADF output bin extension (2 of 2)............................................................................433
Remove the ADF white mylar backing (1 of 3)............................................................................434
Remove the ADF white mylar backing (2 of 3)............................................................................434
Remove the ADF white mylar backing (3 of 3)............................................................................435
Reinstall the ADF white mylar backing springs (1 of 2)...............................................................435
Reinstall the ADF white mylar backing springs (2 of 2)...............................................................436
Remove the ADF front cover (1 of 2)...........................................................................................437
Remove the ADF front cover (2 of 2)...........................................................................................437
Remove the ADF rear cover (1 of 3)............................................................................................438
Remove the ADF rear cover (2 of 3)............................................................................................438
Remove the ADF rear cover (3 of 3)............................................................................................439
Remove the ADF left cover (1 of 2)..............................................................................................440
Remove the ADF left cover (2 of 2)..............................................................................................440
Remove the ADF jam access cover and latch (1 of 3)................................................................441
Remove the ADF jam access cover and latch (2 of 3)................................................................441
Remove the ADF jam access cover and latch (3 of 3)................................................................442
Remove the ADF leading-edge and paper-present sensors (1 of 2)...........................................443
Remove the ADF leading-edge and paper-present sensors (2 of 2)...........................................443
ENWW
Figure 6-325
Figure 6-326
Figure 6-327
Figure 6-328
Figure 6-329
Figure 6-330
Figure 6-331
Figure 6-332
Figure 6-333
Figure 6-334
Figure 6-335
Figure 6-336
Figure 6-337
Figure 6-338
Figure 6-339
Figure 6-340
Figure 6-341
Figure 6-342
Figure 6-343
Figure 6-344
Figure 6-345
Figure 6-346
Figure 6-347
Figure 6-348
Figure 6-349
Figure 6-350
Figure 6-351
Figure 6-352
Figure 6-353
Figure 6-354
Figure 6-355
Figure 6-356
Figure 6-357
Figure 6-358
Figure 6-359
Figure 6-360
Figure 6-361
Figure 6-362
Figure 6-363
Figure 6-364
Figure 6-365
Figure 6-366
Figure 6-367
Figure 6-368
Figure 6-369
Figure 6-370
Figure 6-371
Figure 6-372
Figure 6-373
Figure 6-374
ENWW
Remove the ADF hinges (1 of 3)..................................................................................................444
Remove the ADF hinges (2 of 3)..................................................................................................444
Remove the ADF hinges (3 of 3)..................................................................................................445
Remove the 2 X 500-sheet paper input assembly rear cover.....................................................447
Remove the 500-sheet feeder rear cover (1 of 2)........................................................................448
Remove the 500-sheet feeder rear cover (2 of 2)........................................................................448
Remove the 500-sheet feeder left front cover (1 of 2).................................................................449
Remove the 500-sheet feeder left front cover (2 of 2).................................................................449
Remove the right cover (1 of 3)....................................................................................................450
Remove the right cover (2 of 3)....................................................................................................450
Remove the right cover (3 of 3)....................................................................................................451
Remove the left cover (1 of 3)......................................................................................................452
Remove the left cover (2 of 3)......................................................................................................452
Remove the left cover (3 of 3)......................................................................................................453
Remove the right lower cover assembly......................................................................................454
Remove the pickup motor assembly............................................................................................455
Remove the upper lifter drive assembly (1 of 3)..........................................................................456
Remove the upper lifter drive assembly (2 of 3)..........................................................................456
Remove the upper lifter drive assembly (3 of 3)..........................................................................457
Remove the lower lifter drive assembly (1 of 3)...........................................................................457
Remove the lower lifter drive assembly (2 of 3)...........................................................................458
Remove the lower lifter drive assembly (3 of 3)...........................................................................458
Remove the upper pickup drive assembly...................................................................................459
Remove the lower pickup drive assembly....................................................................................460
Remove the upper pickup assembly (1 of 10).............................................................................460
Remove the upper pickup assembly (2 of 10).............................................................................461
Remove the upper pickup assembly (3 of 10).............................................................................461
Remove the upper pickup assembly (4 of 10).............................................................................462
Remove the upper pickup assembly (5 of 109)...........................................................................462
Remove the upper pickup assembly (6 of 10).............................................................................463
Remove the upper pickup assembly (7 of 10).............................................................................463
Remove the upper pickup assembly (8 of 10).............................................................................464
Remove the upper pickup assembly (9 of 10).............................................................................464
Remove the upper pickup assembly (10 of 10)...........................................................................465
Remove the lower pickup assembly (1 of 7)................................................................................466
Remove the lower pickup assembly (2 of 7)................................................................................466
Remove the lower pickup assembly (3 of 7)................................................................................467
Remove the lower pickup assembly (4 of 7)................................................................................467
Remove the lower pickup assembly (5 of 7)................................................................................468
Remove the lower pickup assembly (6 of 7)................................................................................468
Remove the lower pickup assembly (7 of 7)................................................................................469
Remove the paper feeder door-open switch (1 of 2)...................................................................470
Remove the paper feeder door-open switch (2 of 2)...................................................................470
Remove the 2 X 500-sheet feeder driver PCB.............................................................................471
Remove the IPTU front cover and front door (1 of 6)..................................................................472
Remove the IPTU front cover and front door (2 of 6)..................................................................473
Remove the IPTU front cover and front door (3 of 6)..................................................................473
Remove the IPTU front cover and front door (4 of 6)..................................................................474
Remove the IPTU front cover and front door (5 of 6)..................................................................474
Remove the IPTU front cover and front door (6 of 6)..................................................................475
xxxiii
Figure 6-375
Figure 6-376
Figure 6-377
Figure 6-378
Figure 6-379
Figure 6-380
Figure 6-381
Figure 6-382
Figure 7-1
Figure 7-2
Figure 7-3
Figure 7-4
Figure 7-5
Figure 7-6
Figure 7-7
Figure 7-8
Figure 7-9
Figure 7-10
Figure 7-11
Figure 7-12
Figure 7-13
Figure 7-14
Figure 7-15
Figure 7-16
Figure 7-17
Figure 7-18
Figure 7-19
Figure 7-20
Figure 7-21
Figure 7-22
Figure 7-23
Figure 7-24
Figure 7-25
Figure 7-26
Figure 7-27
Figure 7-28
Figure 7-29
Figure 7-30
Figure 7-31
Figure 7-32
Figure 7-33
Figure 7-34
Figure 7-35
Figure 7-36
Figure 7-37
Figure 7-38
Figure 7-39
Figure 7-40
Figure 8-1
Figure 8-2
xxxiv
Remove the IPTU rear cover.......................................................................................................475
Remove the IPTU connector cover (1 of 3).................................................................................476
Remove the IPTU connector cover (2 of 3).................................................................................476
Remove the IPTU connector cover (3 of 3).................................................................................477
Remove the IPTU driver PCB......................................................................................................477
Remove the IPTU driver motors (1 of 3)......................................................................................478
Remove the IPTU driver motors (2 of 3)......................................................................................479
Remove the IPTU driver motors (3 of 3)......................................................................................479
Paper jam locations......................................................................................................................536
Light images.................................................................................................................................574
Light color.....................................................................................................................................575
Dots in vertical lines.....................................................................................................................577
Vertical lines.................................................................................................................................579
Horizontal lines.............................................................................................................................580
Blank spots...................................................................................................................................581
Poor fusing...................................................................................................................................582
Smearing......................................................................................................................................583
Misplaced image..........................................................................................................................584
Engine test print switch................................................................................................................598
Formatter LED..............................................................................................................................654
Tray 2 paper size switch arrangement.........................................................................................656
DC controller component connections.........................................................................................666
Scanner controller PCB component connections........................................................................669
Sensors and switches..................................................................................................................672
Motors...........................................................................................................................................674
Solenoids......................................................................................................................................676
Fans..............................................................................................................................................677
Main assembly PCBs...................................................................................................................678
ADF output bin-full sensor............................................................................................................679
ADF pickup sensors.....................................................................................................................680
ADF motors, fans, and solenoids.................................................................................................680
2 X 500-sheet feeder components...............................................................................................682
IPTU components.........................................................................................................................683
General timing chart.....................................................................................................................684
General circuit diagram (1 of 2)....................................................................................................685
General circuit diagram (2 of 2)....................................................................................................686
Circuit diagram for the 2 X 500-sheet feeder...............................................................................687
Circuit diagram for the scanner....................................................................................................688
Circuit diagram for the IPTU.........................................................................................................689
List of signals for the DC controller (1 of 9)..................................................................................690
List of signals for the DC controller (2 of 9)..................................................................................691
List of signals for the DC controller (3 of 9)..................................................................................692
List of signals for the DC controller (4 of 9)..................................................................................693
List of signals for the DC controller (5 of 9)..................................................................................694
List of signals for the DC controller (6 of 9)..................................................................................695
List of signals for the DC controller (7 of 9)..................................................................................696
List of signals for the DC controller (8 of 9)..................................................................................697
List of signals for the DC controller (9 of 9)..................................................................................698
HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp major components (1 of 2).............................................................706
HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp major components (2 of 2).............................................................707
ENWW
Figure 8-3
Figure 8-4
Figure 8-5
Figure 8-6
Figure 8-7
Figure 8-8
Figure 8-9
Figure 8-10
Figure 8-11
Figure 8-12
Figure 8-13
Figure 8-14
Figure 8-15
Figure 8-16
Figure 8-17
Figure 8-18
Figure 8-19
Figure 8-20
Figure 8-21
Figure 8-22
Figure 8-23
Figure 8-24
Figure 8-25
Figure 8-26
Figure 8-27
Figure 8-28
Figure 8-29
Figure 8-30
Figure 8-31
Figure 8-32
Figure 8-33
Figure 8-34
Figure 8-35
Figure 8-36
Figure 8-37
Figure 8-38
Figure 8-39
Figure 8-40
Figure 8-41
Figure 8-42
Figure 8-43
Figure 8-44
Figure 8-45
Figure 8-46
Figure 8-47
Figure 8-48
Figure 8-49
Figure 8-50
Figure 8-51
Figure 8-52
ENWW
External covers and panels..........................................................................................................710
Right lower cover assembly.........................................................................................................712
Multipurpose tray assembly.........................................................................................................714
Right upper door assembly..........................................................................................................716
Left cover assembly.....................................................................................................................718
Face-down tray assembly............................................................................................................720
Internal components (1 of 8)........................................................................................................722
Internal components (2 of 8)........................................................................................................724
Internal components (3 of 8)........................................................................................................726
Internal components (4 of 8)........................................................................................................728
Internal components (5 of 8)........................................................................................................730
Internal components (6 of 8)........................................................................................................732
Internal components (7 of 8)........................................................................................................734
Internal components (8 of 8)........................................................................................................736
Paper pickup drive assembly.......................................................................................................738
Pickup motor assembly................................................................................................................740
Disengaging drive assembly........................................................................................................742
Lifter drive assembly....................................................................................................................744
Cassette.......................................................................................................................................746
Multipurpose pickup assembly.....................................................................................................748
ETB assembly..............................................................................................................................750
Delivery assembly........................................................................................................................752
Fuser drive assembly...................................................................................................................754
Duplexing unit (1 of 2)..................................................................................................................756
Duplexing unit (2 of 2)..................................................................................................................758
Duplex feed assembly..................................................................................................................760
Fuser assembly............................................................................................................................762
PCB assembly..............................................................................................................................764
ADF assembly..............................................................................................................................766
ADF internal components (1 of 3)................................................................................................768
ADF internal components (2 of 3)................................................................................................770
ADF internal components (3 of 3)................................................................................................772
ADF input tray..............................................................................................................................774
ADF separation pad.....................................................................................................................776
ADF separation pad case.............................................................................................................778
ADF pickup-roller assembly.........................................................................................................780
ADF pickup-roller cover................................................................................................................782
ADF mylar holder assembly.........................................................................................................784
ADF mylar replacement kit...........................................................................................................786
Scanner glass and cover..............................................................................................................788
Scanner base components..........................................................................................................790
Scanner flatbed unit assembly.....................................................................................................792
Scanner covers............................................................................................................................794
Scanner carriage lock assembly..................................................................................................796
Scanner-open sensor assembly...................................................................................................798
Scanner motor fan........................................................................................................................800
Scanner motor..............................................................................................................................802
Scanner belt and pulley assembly...............................................................................................804
Scanner slide rail..........................................................................................................................806
Scanner optical assembly............................................................................................................808
xxxv
Figure 8-53
Figure 8-54
Figure 8-55
Figure 8-56
Figure 8-57
Figure 8-58
Figure 8-59
Figure 8-60
Figure 8-61
Figure 8-62
Figure 8-63
Figure 8-64
Figure 8-65
Figure 8-66
Figure 8-67
xxxvi
2 X 500-sheet paper feeder assembly locations..........................................................................810
2 X 500-sheet feeder external components.................................................................................812
2 X 500-sheet paper feeder internal components (1 of 2)...........................................................814
2 X 500-sheet paper feeder internal components (2 of 2)...........................................................816
2 X 500-paper feeder lifter drive assembly..................................................................................818
Upper paper pickup drive assembly.............................................................................................820
Lower paper pickup drive assembly.............................................................................................822
2 X 500-sheet paper feeder.........................................................................................................824
Upper paper pickup assembly......................................................................................................826
Lower paper pickup assembly......................................................................................................828
Stapler/stacker accessory............................................................................................................830
3-bin mailbox accessory...............................................................................................................832
External covers and panels..........................................................................................................834
Internal components (1 of 2)........................................................................................................836
Internal components (2 of 2)........................................................................................................838
ENWW
1
Product information
This chapter contains information about the following topics:
ENWW
●
HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp series configurations
●
Features and benefits of the MFP
●
MFP parts and accessories
●
Site requirements
●
MFP specifications
●
Media specifications
●
Printing on special media
●
Regulatory information
●
Declaration of conformity (HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp)
1
HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp series configurations
The HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp series is available in the following configurations.
HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp (Q7517A)
The HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp comes standard with the following items:
2
●
100-sheet multipurpose input tray (tray 1)
●
Three 500-sheet input trays
●
Automatic document feeder (ADF) that holds up to 50 pages
●
Duplexer
●
HP Jetdirect embedded print server for connecting to a 10/100Base-T network
●
256 megabytes (MB) synchronous dynamic random access memory (SDRAM)
●
Hard drive
Chapter 1
Product information
ENWW
HP Color LaserJet 4730x mfp (Q7518A)
The HP Color LaserJet 4730x mfp has the same features as the base model and also includes an
analog fax accessory.
HP Color LaserJet 4730xs mfp (Q7519A)
The HP Color LaserJet 4730xs mfp has the same features as the base model and also includes the
following items:
ENWW
●
Analog fax accessory
●
Stapler/stacker accessory
●
Output accessory bridge
HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp series configurations
3
HP Color LaserJet 4730xm mfp (Q7520A)
The HP Color LaserJet 4730xm mfp has the same features as the base model and also includes the
following items:
4
●
Analog fax accessory
●
3-bin mailbox accessory
●
Output accessory bridge
Chapter 1
Product information
ENWW
Features and benefits of the MFP
The HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp series is designed to be shared by a workgroup. Use the MFP to
copy and print color and black-and-white documents or to digitally send color and black-and-white
documents. The MFP is a standalone copier that does not require connection to a computer. With
the optional HP LaserJet analog fax accessory 300 (included with some models), the MFP can also
send and receive faxes. Digital sending can be selected from the control panel.
Functions
●
Two-sided printing and copying (duplexing)
●
Image modification
●
Color digital sending
●
Document finishing
Speed and throughput
●
Up to 31 pages per minute (ppm) when printing and copying on letter-size paper; up to 30 ppm
when printing and copying on A4-size paper
●
25% to 400% scalability when using the scanner glass
●
25% to 200% scalability when using the automatic document feeder (ADF)
●
First page prints in less than 10 seconds
●
Transmit Once, Raster Image Processing (RIP) ONCE technology
●
Duty cycle of up to 85,000 pages per month
●
533-megahertz (MHz) microprocessor
Resolution
●
600 dots per inch (dpi) with Resolution Enhancement technology (REt)
●
HP FastRes and HP Resolution Enhancement technology (REt) for 1200 by 1200 effective dpi
at full engine speed
Memory
●
256 MB of random-access memory (RAM), expandable to 512 MB by using industry-standard
100-pin double data rate dual inline memory modules (DDR DIMMs)
●
Memory Enhancement technology (MEt) that automatically compresses data to use RAM more
efficiently
User interface
ENWW
●
Graphic display on the control panel
●
HP Easy Printer Care software (a Web-based status and troubleshooting tool)
Features and benefits of the MFP
5
●
Internet-enabled supply-ordering capabilities using HP Easy Printer Care software
●
Embedded Web server to gain access to support and to order supplies (for network-connected
products)
Language and fonts
●
HP Printer Command Language (PCL) 6
●
HP PCL 5e for compatibility
●
Printer Management Language
●
PDF
●
XHTML
●
80 scalable TrueType typefaces
●
HP PostScript® 3 emulation (PS)
Copying and sending
●
Modes for text, graphics, and mixed text and graphics formats
●
Job-interrupt feature (at copy boundaries)
●
Multiple pages per sheet
●
Operator attendance animations (for example, jam recovery)
●
E-mail compatibility
●
Energy-saving Sleep mode
●
Automatic duplex (two-sided) scanning
Print cartridges
●
Each print cartridge prints up to 12,000 pages at 5% coverage
●
No-shake cartridge design
●
Authentic HP print cartridge detection
●
Automatic toner strip removal
Paper handling
●
6
Input
●
Tray 1 (multipurpose tray): A multipurpose tray for paper, transparencies, labels, and
envelopes. Holds up to 100 sheets of paper or 10 envelopes.
●
Trays 2, 3, and 4: 500-sheet trays. These trays automatically detect standard paper sizes
up to legal and allow printing on custom-size paper.
●
Automatic document feeder (ADF): Holds up to 50 sheets of paper.
Chapter 1
Product information
ENWW
●
●
Duplex printing and copying: Two-sided printing and copying (printing on both sides of
the paper).
●
ADF duplex scanning: The ADF has an automatic duplexer for scanning two-sided
documents.
Output
●
Standard output bin: The standard output bin is located on the left side of the MFP. This
bin can hold up to 500 sheets of paper.
●
ADF output bin: The ADF output bin is underneath the ADF input tray. The bin holds up to
50 sheets of paper, and the MFP automatically stops when this bin is full.
●
Optional stapler/stacker: The stapler/stacker staples up to 30 sheets and stacks up to
500 sheets.
●
Optional 3-bin mailbox: One bin stacks up to 500 sheets, and two bins stack up to
100 sheets each for a total capacity of 700 sheets.
Connectivity
●
IEEE 1284C-compliant parallel connection
●
Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) connection (AUX) for connecting other devices
●
Local area network (LAN) connector (RJ-45) for the embedded HP Jetdirect print server
●
Optional analog fax card
●
Optional HP Digital Sending Software (DSS)
●
Optional enhanced input/output (EIO) cards
●
USB 2.0
●
ACC port (accessory port with USB host capabilities)
●
AUX port (auxiliary port for connecting third-party devices)
Environmental features
●
The Sleep setting saves energy (meets ENERGY STAR® guidelines, Version 1.3).
NOTE See Protecting the environment on page 33 for more information.
Security features
ENWW
●
Foreign Interface Harness (FIH)
●
Secure Disk Erase
●
Security lock
●
Job retention
●
DSS authentication
Features and benefits of the MFP
7
Minimum system requirements for e-mail functionality
To use the e-mail functionality, the MFP must be connected to an IP-based network that has a
simple mail transfer protocol (SMTP) server. This server can either be on the local area network or at
an outside Internet service provider (ISP). HP recommends that the MFP be located on the same
local area network (LAN) as the SMTP server. If using an ISP, connect to the ISP by using a digital
subscriber line (DSL) connection. If obtaining e-mail services from an ISP, ask the ISP to provide the
correct SMTP address. Dial-up connections are not supported. If an SMTP server is not on the
network, third-party software is available that allows the creation of an SMTP server. However,
purchase and support of this software is the purchaser's responsibility.
8
Chapter 1
Product information
ENWW
MFP parts and accessories
Before using the MFP, become familiar with the parts of the MFP.
MFP parts
ENWW
1
Automatic document feeder (ADF) top cover
2
ADF input tray for copy/scan/fax originals
3
Control panel status lights
4
Control panel display with touch-screen functionality
5
Control panel keypad
6
Right-side covers (provides access to the print cartridges and other consumables)
7
Trays 2, 3, and 4
8
Paper level indicators
9
On/off switch
10
Output bin
11
Scanner lock
MFP parts and accessories
9
10
1
Output bin
2
Interface ports
3
On/off switch
4
Power connection
Chapter 1
Product information
ENWW
Interface ports
The MFP has eight ports for connecting to a computer or a network. The ports are at the left rear
corner of the MFP.
1
Foreign interface harness (FIH)
2
USB 2.0
3
ACC (accessory port uses host USB protocol)
4
Fax connection (for connecting to an optional analog fax accessory)
5
Parallel port
6
EIO interface expansion slot
7
Access port for Kensington lock
8
Network connection (embedded Jetdirect print server)
9
AUX port
Model and serial numbers
The model numbers and serial numbers are located underneath the top cover, at the rear of the MFP.
ENWW
MFP parts and accessories
11
Accessories and supplies
Increase the capabilities of the MFP by adding optional accessories. For information about ordering
accessories and supplies, see Parts and supplies on page 43.
NOTE Use the accessories and supplies that have been specifically designed for the MFP in
order to ensure optimum performance.
12
1
Stapler/stacker (Q7521A); includes an output accessory bridge
2
Staple cartridge (C8091A)
3
Print cartridge (four print cartridges) (Q6460A, Q6461A, Q6462A, and Q6463A)
4
3-bin mailbox (Q7523A); includes an output accessory bridge
5
Memory DIMMS and flash memory cards
6
HP Jetdirect print server (EIO card)
7
HP LaserJet analog fax accessory 300 (Q3701A)
Chapter 1
Product information
ENWW
Parts compatibility with other HP LaserJet products
Some parts and accessories for this MFP are compatible with the HP Color LaserJet 4700. Table 1-1
Parts compatibility on page 13 indicates which parts and accessories can be installed on other
products. It also indicates which parts from other products are not compatible with this MFP.
Table 1-1 Parts compatibility
Part
Description
Product number
HP Color
LaserJet 4700
Print cartridges
Black (12,000 pages)
Q6460A
No
Cyan (12,000 pages)
Q6461A
No
Yellow (12,000 pages)
Q6462A
No
Magenta (12,000 pages)
Q6463A
No
128 MB DDR DIMM
Q7721A
Yes
256 MB DDR DIMM
Q7722A
Yes
512 MB DDR DIMM
Q7723A
Yes
USB, serial, and LocalTalk
J4135A
Yes
620n Fast Ethernet 10/100Base-TX
J7934A
Yes
J6054B
No
110 volt
Q7502A
Yes
220 volt
Q7503A
Yes
ETB kit
Q7504A
Yes
ADF maintenance kit
Q5597A
No
DIMMs
HP Jetdirect EIO cards
Hard disk
Fuser kit
ENWW
MFP parts and accessories
13
Moving the MFP
Before moving the MFP, be sure to lock the scanner. The scanner lock is underneath the scanner lid,
to the left of the scanner glass.
NOTE After moving the MFP, unlock the scanner. The MFP cannot initialize correctly when
the scanner is locked.
14
Chapter 1
Product information
ENWW
Site requirements
Place the MFP on a level floor or sturdy surface, away from direct sunlight. Allow enough space
around the MFP to open the doors and trays.
Physical specifications
Table 1-2 Product dimensions
1
Product
Height
Depth
Width
Weight1
HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp
1153 mm
(45.4 inches)
639 mm
(25.2 inches)
788 mm
(31 inches)
124 kg (273 lb)
HP Color LaserJet 4730x mfp
1153 mm
(45.4 inches)
639 mm
(25.2 inches)
788 mm
(31 inches)
124 kg (273 lb)
HP Color LaserJet 4730xs mfp
1153 mm
(45.4 inches)
639 mm
(25.2 inches)
1106 mm
(43.5 inches)
136 kg (298 lb)
HP Color LaserJet 4730xm mfp
1153 mm
(45.4 inches)
639 mm
(25.2 inches)
1106 mm
(43.5 inches)
136 kg (298 lb)
Without print cartridge
Table 1-3 Product dimensions
Product
Width
Depth
Height
HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp
788 mm (31 inches)
639 mm (25.2 inches)
1153 mm (45.4 inches)
HP Color LaserJet 4730x mfp
788 mm (31 inches)
639 mm (25.2 inches)
1153 mm (45.4 inches)
HP Color LaserJet 4730xs mfp
1106 mm (43.5 inches)
639 mm (25.2 inches)
1153 mm (45.4 inches)
HP Color LaserJet 4730xm mfp
1106 mm (43.5 inches)
639 mm (25.2 inches)
1153 mm (45.4 inches)
Environmental specifications
Table 1-4 Environmental specifications
ENWW
Environmental condition
Recommended
Allowed
Storage/standby
Temperature (MFP and print
cartridge)
17° to 25°C (62.6° to 77°F)
15° to 30°C (59° to 78°F)
-20° to 40°C (-4° to 104°F)
Relative humidity
30% to 70% relative
humidity (RH)
10% to 80% RH
10% to 90%
Altitude
N/A
0 meters (0 feet) to 2600
meters (8530 feet)
N/A
Site requirements
15
MFP specifications
Electrical specifications
WARNING! Power requirements are based on the country/region where the MFP is sold. Do
not convert operating voltages. This can damage the MFP and void the product warranty.
Table 1-5 Power requirements
Specification
110-volt models
230-volt models
Power requirements
110 to 127 volts (± 10%)
220 to 240 volts (± 10%)
50/60 Hz (± 2 Hz)
50/60 Hz (± 2 Hz)
9.0 Amps
4.5 Amps
Rated current
Table 1-6 Power consumption (average, in watts)
1
2
3
4
5
6
16
Product model1 , 2
Copying3
Printing3
Ready4 , 6
On5
Off
HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp
615 W
604 W
83 W
24 W
0.5 W
HP Color LaserJet 4730x mfp
615 W
604 W
83 W
24 W
0.5 W
HP Color LaserJet 4730xs mfp
615 W
604 W
83 W
24 W
0.5 W
HP Color LaserJet 4730xm mfp
640 W
626 W
86 W
25 W
0.5 W
Values subject to change. See http://www.hp.com/support/clj4730mfp for current information.
Power numbers are the highest values measured using all standard voltages.
HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp printing and copying speeds are 31 ppm letter size and 30 ppm A4 size.
Default time from Ready mode to Sleep mode is 45 minutes.
Recovery time from Sleep mode to start of printing is less than 20 seconds.
Heat dissipation in Ready mode = 288 BTU/hour.
Chapter 1
Product information
ENWW
Acoustic specifications
Table 1-7 Sound power and pressure level1 (Product Name: X)
Sound power level
Declared per ISO 9296
Printing2
LWAd= 6.7 Bels (A) [67 dB(A)]
Copying3
LWAd= 6.8 Bels (A) [68 dB(A)]
Ready
LWAd= 5.8 Bels (A) [58 dB(A)]
Sound pressure level
Declared per ISO 9296
Printing2
LpAm=50 dB (A)
Copying3
LpAm=52 dB (A)
Ready
LpAm=37 dB (A)
1
2
3
Values subject to change. See http://www.hp.com/support/clj4730mfp for current information.
HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp series speed is 30 ppm A4 size. Configuration tested (HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp): Base
model, simplex printing with A4 paper size.
Configuration tested (HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp): Base model, simplex copying from ADF with A4 paper size.
Image area
The MFP can place printed or copied images on the page within the following margins:
●
Printing: 4.23 mm (0.17 inches) from each edge
●
Copying (standard): 4.23 mm (0.17 inches) from each edge
NOTE Margins vary when using digital sending. The margins depend on the type of file
being sent and its dpi resolution.
Skew specifications
The MFP has the following skew specifications:
ENWW
●
Print engine (cut-sheet paper; simplex and duplex): less than 1.5 mm (0.06 inches) over a 260
mm (10.24 inches) length
●
Print engine (envelopes): less than 3.3 mm (0.13 inches) over a 220 mm (8.66 inches) length
●
ADF and scanner glass (cut-sheet paper): less than 0.6%
MFP specifications
17
Media specifications
This section provides comprehensive information on supported media types.
Category
Specifications
Acid content
5.5 pH to 8.0 pH
Caliper
0.094 mm (3.0 to 7.0 mils)
Curl in ream
Flat within 5 mm (0.02 inches)
Cut edge conditions
Cut with sharp blades that create no visible fray
Fusing compatibility
Must not scorch, melt, offset, or release hazardous
emissions when heated to 200°C (392°F) for 0.1 second
Grain
Long grain
Moisture content
3% to 9% by weight
Smoothness
100 to 250 Sheffield
Printing and paper storage environment
Ideally, the printing and paper storage environment should be at or near room temperature, and not
too dry or too humid. Remember that paper is hygroscopic; it absorbs and loses moisture rapidly.
Heat works with humidity to damage paper. Heat causes the moisture in paper to evaporate, while
cold causes it to condense on the sheets. Heating systems and air conditioners remove most of the
humidity from a room. As paper is opened and used, it loses moisture, causing streaks and
smudging. Humid weather or water coolers can cause the humidity to increase in a room. As paper is
opened and used it absorbs any excess moisture, causing light print and dropouts. Also, as paper
loses and gains moisture it can distort. This can cause jams.
As a result, paper storage and handling are as important as the paper-making process itself. Paper
storage environmental conditions directly affect the feed operation.
Care should be taken not to purchase more paper than can be easily used in a short time (about
3 months). Paper stored for long periods might experience heat and moisture extremes, which can
cause damage. Planning is important to prevent damage to a large supply of paper.
Unopened paper in sealed reams can remain stable for several months before use. Opened
packages of paper have more potential for environmental damage, especially if they are not wrapped
with a moisture-proof barrier.
The paper storage environment should be properly maintained to ensure optimum MFP
performance. The required condition is 20° to 24°C (68° to 75°F), with a relative humidity of
45% to 55%. The following guidelines should be helpful when evaluating the paper storage
environment:
18
●
Paper should be stored at or near room temperature.
●
The air should not be too dry or too humid (due to the hygroscopic properties of paper).
●
The best way to store an opened ream of paper is to rewrap it tightly in its moisture-proof
wrapping. If the MFP environment is subject to extremes, unwrap only the amount of paper to
be used during the day's operation to prevent unwanted moisture changes.
Chapter 1
Product information
ENWW
Envelopes
Envelope construction is critical. Envelope fold lines can vary considerably, not only between
manufacturers, but also within a box from the same manufacturer. Successful printing on envelopes
depends upon the quality of the envelopes. When selecting envelopes, consider the following
components:
●
Weight: The weight of the envelope paper should not exceed 105 g/m2 (28 lb) or jamming might
occur.
●
Construction: Prior to printing, envelopes should lie flat with less than 6 mm (0.25 inches) curl,
and should not contain air.
●
Condition: Envelopes should not be wrinkled, nicked, or otherwise damaged.
●
Temperature: Use envelopes that are compatible with the heat and pressure of the MFP.
●
Size: Use only envelopes that are within the following size ranges:
●
Minimum: 76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches)
●
Maximum: 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)
NOTE Use only tray 1 to print on envelopes. Some jams might occur when using any media
with a length less than 178 mm (7 inches). This might be caused by paper that has been
affected by environmental conditions. For optimum performance, make sure to store and
handle the paper correctly. Select envelopes in the printer driver.
ENWW
Media specifications
19
Envelopes that have double side seams
Double side-seam construction has vertical seams at both ends of the envelope rather than diagonal
seams. This style might be more likely to wrinkle. Be sure that the seam extends all the way to the
corner of the envelope, as illustrated.
Envelopes that have adhesive strips or flaps
Envelopes that have a peel-off adhesive strip or with more than one flap that folds over to seal must
use adhesives that are compatible with the heat and pressure in the MFP. The extra flaps and strips
might cause wrinkling, creasing, or jams, and might even damage the fuser.
Envelope margins
The following table shows typical address margins for a commercial #10 or DL envelope.
Type of address
Top margin
Left margin
Return address
15 mm (0.6 inches)
15 mm (0.6 inches)
Delivery address
51 mm (2 inches)
89 mm (3.5 inches)
NOTE For the best print quality, position margins no closer than 15 mm (0.6 inches) from the
edges of the envelope. Avoid printing over the area where the envelope seams meet.
Envelope storage
Proper storage of envelopes helps contribute to print quality. Envelopes should be stored flat. If air is
trapped in an envelope, creating an air bubble, then the envelope might wrinkle during printing.
20
Chapter 1
Product information
ENWW
Labels
CAUTION To avoid damaging the MFP, use only labels that are recommended for use in
laser printers. Never print on the same sheet of labels more than once or print on a partial
sheet of labels.
Label construction
When selecting labels, consider the quality of each component:
●
Adhesives: The adhesive material should be stable at 200°C (392°F), the MFP's fusing
temperature.
●
Arrangement: Only use labels that have no exposed backing between them. Labels can peel
off sheets that have spaces between the labels, causing serious jams.
●
Curl: Prior to printing, labels must lie flat with no more than 13 mm (0.5 inches) of curl in any
direction.
●
Condition: Do not use sheets of labels that have wrinkles, bubbles, or other indications of
separation.
NOTE Select labels in the printer driver.
Transparencies
Transparencies used in the MFP must be able to withstand 200°C (392°F), the MFP's fusing
temperature.
CAUTION To avoid damaging the MFP, use only transparencies recommended for use in
HP LaserJet printers, such as HP-brand transparencies.
NOTE Select transparencies in the printer driver.
ENWW
Media specifications
21
Supported types and sizes of print media
The following table lists the types of media that the MFP supports.
Table 1-8 Supported types of media
Type of media
1
2
Tray 1
Trays 2, 3, and 4 Duplexer
3-bin mailbox
or stacker
Stapler
Plain
X
X
X
X
X
Preprinted
X
X
X
X
X
Letterhead
X
X
X
X
X
Transparency
X
X
Prepunched
X
X
Labels
X
X
Bond
X
X
X
X
X
Recycled
X
X
X
X
X
Color
X
X
X
X
X
Cardstock
X
Rough
X
Envelope
X
X
X
X
X
X
X12
X
X
X
X
X12
Face-down delivery only.
If a 3-bin mailbox is installed, select the bottom bin when printing on cardstock. Media weights that are 200 g/m2 (53 lb) or
heavier are supported only in the bottom bin.
Table 1-9 Tray 1 media sizes
Tray 1
Dimensions
Weight or thickness
Capacity
Paper and cardstock,
standard sizes (letter/A4,
legal, executive, JIS B5, A5);
custom sizes
Range:
Range:
Maximum stack height:
10 mm (0.6 inches)
76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches) to
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)
60 g/m2 (16 lb) bond to
220 g/m2 (60 lb) bond
Glossy paper (letter/A4,
legal, executive, JIS B5, A5)
Range:
Range:
76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches) to
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)
75 g/m2 (20 lb) bond to
220 g/m2 (60 lb) bond
Letter: 216 x 279 mm
(8.5 x 11 inches)
Minimum 0.13 mm
(0.005 inches) thick
NOTE Do not use
inkjet papers in this
MFP.
Transparencies (letter/A4),
suitable for use in color laser
printers
Equivalent to 100 sheets
of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) bond
Maximum stack height:
10 mm (0.6 inches)
Maximum stack height:
10 mm (0.6 inches)
A4: 210 x 297 mm
(8.27 x 11.7 inches)
HP Tough paper (letter/A4)
22
Chapter 1
Letter: 216 x 279 mm
(8.5 x 11 inches)
Product information
0.13 mm (0.005 inches) thick Maximum stack height:
10 mm (0.6 inches)
ENWW
Table 1-9 Tray 1 media sizes (continued)
Tray 1
Dimensions
Weight or thickness
Capacity
220 g/m2 (60 lb) bond
Maximum stack height:
10 mm (0.6 inches)
Range:
20 envelopes
A4: 210 x 297 mm
(8.27 x 11.7 inches)
HP Color Laser Glossy
Photo Paper (letter/A4)
NOTE Do not use
inkjet papers in this
MFP.
Letter: 216 x 279 mm
(8.5 x 11 inches)
A4: 210 x 297 mm
(8.27 x 11.7 inches)
Envelopes (Com 10,
Monarch, C5, DL, B5)
60 g/m2 (16 lb) bond to 90 g/
m2 (24 lb) bond
Labels (letter/A4, legal,
executive, JIS B5, A5),
suitable for use in color laser
printers
Range:
Maximum 0.23 mm
(0.009 inches) thick
Maximum stack height:
10 mm (0.6 inches)
76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches) to
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)
Table 1-10 Tray 2, 3, and 4 media sizes1
Trays 2, 3, and 4
Dimensions
Weight or thickness
Capacity
Paper, standard sizes (letter/
A4, legal, executive, JIS B5,
A5); custom sizes
Range:
Range:
Maximum stack height:
56 mm (2.2 inches)
148 x 210 mm
(5.83 x 8.27 inches) to
216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 inches)
60 g/m2 (16 lb) bond to
120 g/m2 (32 lb) bond
Range:
Range:
148 x 210 mm
(5.83 x 8.27 inches) to
216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 inches)
75 g/m2 (20 lb) bond to
120 g/m2 (32 lb) bond
Letter: 216 x 279 mm
(8.5 x 11 inches)
120 g/m2 (32 lb) bond
Maximum stack height:
56 mm (2.2 inches)
Minimum:
Maximum stack height:
56 mm (2.2 inches)
Glossy paper (letter/A4,
legal, executive, JIS B5, A5)
NOTE Do not use
inkjet papers in this
MFP.
HP Color Laser Glossy
Photo & Imaging Paper
(letter/A4)
NOTE Do not use
inkjet papers in this
MFP.
Transparencies (letter/A4),
suitable for use in color laser
printers
Equivalent to 530 sheets of
75 g/m2 (20 lb) bond
Maximum stack height:
56 mm (2.2 inches)
A4: 210 x 297 mm
(8.27 x 11.7 inches)
Letter: 216 x 279 mm
(8.5 x 11 inches)
0.13 mm (0.005 inches) thick
A4: 210 x 297 mm
(8.27 x 11.7 inches)
HP Tough Paper (letter/A4)
Letter: 216 x 279 mm
(8.5 x 11 inches)
Maximum:
Maximum stack height:
56 mm (2.2 inches)
0.13 mm (0.005 inches) thick
A4: 210 x 297 mm
(8.27 x 11.7 inches)
ENWW
Media specifications
23
Table 1-10 Tray 2, 3, and 4 media sizes (continued)
1
Trays 2, 3, and 4
Dimensions
Weight or thickness
Capacity
Labels (letter/A4 and custom
sizes), suitable for use in
color laser printers
Range:
Maximum:
Maximum stack height:
56 mm (2.2 inches)
148 x 210 mm
(5.83 x 8.27 inches) to
216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 inches)
0.13 mm (0.005 inches) thick
Trays 2, 3, and 4 use custom sizes specifically for B5 ISO. These trays do not support the range of custom sizes that can
be used in tray 1.
Table 1-11 Automatic duplex printing (two-sided printing)
Automatic duplex printing
Dimensions
Weight or thickness
Paper
Standard sizes:
Range:
Letter: 216 x 279 mm
(8.5 x 11 inches)
60 g/m2 (16 lb) bond to
120 g/m2 (32 lb) bond
A4: 210 x 297 mm
(8.27 x 11.7 inches)
8.5 x 13: 216 x 330.2 mm
(8.5 x 13 inches)
Legal: 216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 inches)
Executive:
184.2 x 266.7 mm
(7.25 x 10.5 inches)
JIS B5: 182 x 257 mm
(7.17 x 10.12 inches)
Glossy paper (A4/letter,
13 x 8.5 in, legal, executive,
JIS B5)
See above for standard
sizes supported
Range:
75 g/m2 (20 lb) bond to
120 g/m2 (32 lb) bond
NOTE Do not use
inkjet papers in this
MFP.
HP Color Laser Glossy
Photo & Imaging Paper (A4/
letter)
NOTE Do not use
inkjet papers in this
MFP.
Standard sizes:
120 g/m2 (32 lb) bond
Letter: 216 x 279 mm
(8.5 x 11 inches)
A4: 210 x 297 mm
(8.27 x 11.7 inches)
Table 1-12 Optional 3-bin mailbox or stacker part of the stapler/stacker supported sizes
24
Size
Dimensions1
Weight
Capacity2
Letter
216 x 279 mm
(8.5 x 11 inches)
For plain media: 60 g/m2
(16 lb) to 120 g/m2 (32 lb)
For the stacker on the
stapler/stacker or the lower
Chapter 1
Product information
ENWW
Table 1-12 Optional 3-bin mailbox or stacker part of the stapler/stacker supported sizes (continued)
Size
Dimensions1
Weight
Capacity2
For thick media: 128 g/m2
(34 lb) to 199 g/m2 (53 lb)
bin on the 3-bin mailbox:
500 sheets of 75 g/m2
(20 lb) paper.
For the top two bins on the 3bin mailbox: each can hold
100 sheets of 75 g/m2
(20 lb) paper.
A4
210 x 297 mm
(8.27 x 11.7 inches)
Executive
184.2 x 266.7 mm
(7.25 x 10.5 inches)
Legal
216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 inches)
B5 (JIS)
182 x 257 mm
(7.17 x 10.12 inches)
A5
148 x 210 mm
(5.8 x 8.3 inches)
Statement
140 x 216 mm
(5.5 x 8.5 inches)
8.5x13
216 x 330 mm
(8.5 x 13 inches)
Executive (JIS)
216 x 330 mm
(8.5 x 13 inches)
DPostcard (JIS)
148 x 200 mm
(5.8 x 7.9 inches)
16K
197 x 273 mm
(7.75 x 10.75 inches)
Envelope #101
105 x 241 mm
(4.1 x 9.5 inches)
Envelope Monarch #71
98 x 191 mm
(3.9 x 7.5 inches)
Envelope C5 ISO1
162 x 229 mm
(6.4 x 9.0 inches)
Envelope DL ISO1
110 x 220 mm
(4.3 x 8.7 inches)
Envelope B5 ISO1
176 x 250 mm
(6.7 x 9.8 inches)
Custom
Minimum: 76 x 127 mm
(3 x 5 inches)
Maximum: 216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 inches)
ENWW
Media specifications
25
Table 1-12 Optional 3-bin mailbox or stacker part of the stapler/stacker supported sizes (continued)
Size
Dimensions1
Weight
Capacity2
Cardstock, transparencies,
and labels are supported
only in the third bin of the 3bin mailbox.
1
2
3
The MFP supports a wide range of sizes. Check the MFP software for supported sizes.
Capacity can vary depending on paper weight and thickness, as well as environmental conditions.
Face-down delivery only.
Table 1-13 Stapler part of the optional stapler/stacker supported sizes
26
Size
Dimensions
Weight
Capacity
Letter
216 x 279 mm
(8.5 x 11 inches)
For plain media: 60 g/m2
(16 lb) to 120 g/m2 (32 lb)
For plain media: 30 sheets
of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) paper.
For thick media: 128 g/m2
(34 lb) to 199 g/m2 (53 lb)
For glossy media: 20 sheets
A4
210 x 297 mm
(8.27 x 11.7 inches)
Legal
216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 inches)
8.5x13
216 x 330 mm
(8.5 x 13 inches)
Executive(JIS)
216 x 330 mm
(8.5 x 13 inches)
Chapter 1
Product information
For thick media: the stack
height must not exceed
7 mm (0.27 inches)
ENWW
Printing on special media
Use these guidelines when printing on special types of media.
NOTE Special media such as envelopes, transparencies, custom-size media, or heavy
media greater than 120 g/m2 should only be used in Tray 1.
To print on any special media, use the following procedure:
1.
Load the media in Tray 1.
2.
When the MFP prompts you for the paper type, select the correct media type for the media
loaded in the tray. For example, select PHOTO GLOSS when loading HP Color LaserJet Glossy
Photo Paper.
3.
In the software application or the printer driver, set the media type to match the media type that
is loaded in the media tray.
NOTE For the best print quality, always verify that the media type selected on the MFP
control panel and the media type selected in the application or printer driver match the type of
media loaded in the tray.
Transparencies
When printing on transparencies, use the following guidelines:
●
Handle transparencies using the edges. Oils from your fingers deposited on the transparency
can cause print quality problems.
●
Use only overhead transparencies recommended for use in this MFP. Hewlett-Packard
recommends using HP Color LaserJet Transparencies. HP products are designed to work
together for optimum printing results.
●
In either the software application or the driver, select TRANSPARENCY as the media type, or
print from a tray that is configured for transparencies.
CAUTION Transparencies not designed for HP Color LaserJet printing might melt in the
printer or wrap around the fuser, causing damage to the MFP.
Glossy paper
●
In either the software application or the driver, select GLOSSY, HEAVY GLOSSY, or
INTERMEDIATE90-104 as the media type, or print from a tray that is configured for glossy paper.
●
Use the control panel to set the media type to GLOSSY for the input tray being used.
●
Because this affects all print jobs, it is important to return the MFP to its original settings once
the job has printed.
NOTE Hewlett-Packard recommends using HP Color LaserJet Glossy Photo Paper and soft
glossy papers designed for use in HP Color LaserJet printers. HP products are designed to
work together for optimum printing results. If other types of glossy media are used, print
quality could be compromised.
ENWW
Printing on special media
27
Colored paper
●
Colored paper should be of the same high quality as white xerographic paper.
●
Pigments used in colored media must be able to withstand the MFP’s fusing temperature of 190°
C (374°F) for 0.1 second without deterioration.
●
The MFP creates colors by printing patterns of dots, overlaying and varying their spacing to
produce various colors. Varying the shade or color of the paper will affect the shades of the
printed colors.
Envelopes
NOTE Envelopes can be printed only from Tray 1. Set the tray’s media size to the specific
envelope size.
Adhering to the following guidelines will help ensure proper printing on envelopes and help prevent
paper jams:
●
Do not load more than 20 envelopes into Tray 1.
●
The weight rating of envelopes should not exceed 90 g/m2 (24 lb bond).
●
Envelopes should be flat.
●
Do not use envelopes with windows or clasps.
●
Envelopes must not be wrinkled, nicked, or otherwise damaged.
●
Envelopes with peel-off adhesive strips must use adhesives that can withstand the heat and
pressures of the MFP’s fusing process.
●
Envelopes should be loaded face-down and with the postage end feeding into the MFP first.
Labels
NOTE For printing labels, set the tray’s media type to LABELS in the MFP control panel.
When printing labels, use the following guidelines:
28
●
Verify that the labels’ adhesive material can tolerate temperatures of 190°C (374°F) for
0.1 second.
●
Verify that there is no exposed adhesive material between the labels. Exposed areas can cause
labels to peel off during printing, which can cause paper jams. Exposed adhesive can also
cause damage to MFP components.
●
Do not re-feed a sheet of labels.
●
Verify that the labels lie flat.
●
Do not use labels that are wrinkled, bubbled, or otherwise damaged.
Chapter 1
Product information
ENWW
Heavy paper
The following heavy paper types can be used with the HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp series MFP.
Table 1-14 Supported heavy paper types
Paper type
Paper weight
Heavy and extra-heavy stock
105-163 g/m2 (28-43 lb)
Cardstock
164-220 g/m2 (43-58 lb)
Intermediate
90-105 g/m2 (24-28 lb)
HP Tough paper
5 mil
When printing on heavy paper types, use the following guidelines:
●
Use Tray 1 for paper that is heavier than 120 g/m2 (32 lb).
●
For optimum results when printing on heavy paper, use the MFP control panel to set the media
type for the tray to the appropriate paper type listed in Table 1-14 Supported heavy paper types
on page 29.
●
In either the software application or the driver, select the appropriate paper type as the media
type, or print from a tray that is configured for heavy paper.
●
Because this setting affects all print jobs, it is important to return the MFP back to its original
settings once the job has printed.
CAUTION In general, do not use paper that is heavier than the media specification
recommended for this MFP. Doing so can cause misfeeds, paper jams, reduced print quality,
and excessive mechanical wear.
HP LaserJet Tough paper
When printing on HP LaserJet Tough paper, use the following guidelines:
●
Handle HP LaserJet Tough paper only by the edges. Oils from your fingers deposited on
HP LaserJet Tough paper can cause print quality problems.
●
Use only HP LaserJet Tough paper with this MFP. HP products are designed to work together
for optimum printing results.
●
In either the software application or the driver, select TOUGH PAPER as the media type, or
print from a tray that is configured for HP LaserJet Tough paper.
Preprinted forms and letterhead
Observe the following guidelines for best results with preprinted forms and letterhead:
ENWW
●
Forms and letterhead must be printed with heat-resistant inks that will not melt, vaporize, or
release undesirable emissions when subjected to the MFP’s fusing temperature of
approximately 190°C (374°F) for 0.1 second.
●
Inks must be non-flammable and should not adversely affect any printer rollers.
Printing on special media
29
●
Forms and letterhead should be sealed in a moisture-proof wrapping to prevent changes during
storage.
●
Before loading preprinted paper such as forms and letterhead, verify that the ink on the paper is
dry. During the fusing process, wet ink can come off of preprinted paper.
●
To load pre-printed forms and letterhead into Tray 1, load them face down with the top edge of
the page facing toward you.
●
To load pre-printed forms and letterhead into Tray 2 or an optional tray, load them face up with
the top edge of the page facing away from you.
●
When duplex printing, load pre-printed forms and letterhead into Tray 2 or an optional 500-sheet
tray face down with the top edge of the page towards you.
Recycled paper
This MFP supports the use of recycled paper. Recycled paper must meet the same specifications as
standard paper. Hewlett-Packard recommends that recycled paper contain no more than 5% ground
wood.
Weight equivalence table
The weight equivalence table shows equivalent weights for different grades of paper. A boldface type
value indicates a commonly available standard weight for that grade.
NOTE Text and book grades marked with an asterisk (*) actually calculate to 51, 61, 71, and
81 but are rounded to standard book or text weights of 50, 60, 70, and 80.
Table 1-15 Weight equivalence table
30
Bond weight
Text/Book
weight
Cover weight
Bristol weight
Index weight
Tag weight
Metric weight
16
41
22
27
33
37
60 g/m2
17
43
24
29
35
39
64 g/m2
20
50*
28
34
42
46
75 g/m2
21
54
30
36
44
49
80 g/m2
24
60*
33
41
50
55
90 g/m2
27
68
37
45
55
61
100 g/m2
28
70*
39
49
58
65
105 g/m2
29
74
41
50
61
68
110 g/m2
32
80*
44
55
67
74
120 g/m2
36
90
50
62
75
83
135 g/m2
39
100
55
67
82
91
148 g/m2
40
101
55
68
83
92
150 g/m2
43
110
60
74
90
100
163 g/m2
45
115
63
77
94
104
170 g/m2
Chapter 1
Product information
ENWW
Table 1-15 Weight equivalence table (continued)
ENWW
Bond weight
Text/Book
weight
Cover weight
Bristol weight
Index weight
Tag weight
Metric weight
47
119
65
80
97
108
176 g/m2
51
128
70
86
105
117
190 g/m2
53
134
74
90
110
122
199 g/m2
54
137
75
93
113
125
203 g/m2
58
146
80
98
120
133
216 g/m2
65
165
90
111
135
150
244 g/m2
66
169
92
114
138
154
250 g/m2
67
171
94
115
140
155
253 g/m2
70
178
98
120
146
162
264 g/m2
72
183
100
123
150
166
271 g/m2
Printing on special media
31
Regulatory information
FCC and Telecom regulations
FCC regulations
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This
equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case
the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. The end user of this product
should be aware that any changes or modifications made to this equipment without the approval of
Hewlett-Packard could result in the product not meeting the Class A limits, in which case the FCC
could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
NOTE Any changes or modifications to the MFP that are not expressly approved by HP
could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment.
Telecom
This product is intended to be connected to the analog Public Switched Telecommunication
Networks (PSTN) of European Economic Area (EEA) countries/regions. It meets requirements of EU
R Directive 1999/5/EC (Annex II) and carries appropriate CE conformity marking. For more details
see the Declaration of conformity (HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp) on page 39 issued by the
manufacturer.
However, due to differences between individual national PSTNs, the product may not guarantee
unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN termination point. Network
compatibility depends on the correct setting being selected by the customer in preparation of its
connection to the PSTN. Please follow the instructions provided in the user manual. If you
experience network compatibility issues, please contact your equipment supplier or Hewlett-Packard
help desk in the country/region of operation.
Connecting to a PSTN termination point may be the subject of additional requirements set out by the
local PSTN operator.
32
Chapter 1
Product information
ENWW
Environmental Product Stewardship program
Protecting the environment
Hewlett-Packard Company is committed to providing quality products in an environmentally sound
manner. This product has been designed with several attributes to minimize impacts on our
environment.
Ozone production
This product generates no appreciable ozone gas (O3).
Energy consumption
Power usage drops significantly while in Sleep mode, which saves natural resources and saves
money without affecting the high performance of this product. This product qualifies for ENERGY
STAR® (Multifunctional devices, Version 3.0), which is a voluntary program to encourage the
development of energy-efficient office products.
ENERGY STAR® and the ENERGY STAR mark are U.S. registered service marks. As an ENERGY
STAR partner, Hewlett-Packard Company has determined that this product meets ENERGY STAR
Guidelines for energy efficiency. For more information, see http://www.energystar.gov.
Paper use
This product's automatic duplex feature (two-sided printing) and n-up printing (multiple pages printed
on one page) capabilities can reduce media usage and the resulting demands on natural resources.
Plastics
Plastic parts over 25 grams are marked according to international standards that enhance the ability
to identify plastics for recycling purposes at the end of the product's life.
HP LaserJet printing supplies
It is easy to return and recycle your empty HP LaserJet print cartridges—free of charge—with
HP Planet Partners. HP is committed to providing inventive, high-quality products and services that
are environmentally sound, from product design and manufacturing to distribution, operation and
recycling processes. We ensure your returned HP LaserJet print cartridges are recycled properly,
processing them to recover valuable plastics and metals for new products and diverting millions of
tons of waste from landfills. Since this cartridge is being recycled and used in new materials, it will
not be returned to you. Your empty HP LaserJet print cartridges are recycled responsibly when you
participate in the HP Planet Partners program. Thank you for being environmentally responsible!
HP Printing Supplies Returns and Recycling Program Information
In many countries/regions, this product’s printing supplies (print cartridges, fuser, and transfer unit)
can be returned to HP through the HP Printing Supplies Returns and Recycling Program. An easy-touse and free takeback program is available in over 35 countries/regions. Multilingual program
ENWW
Regulatory information
33
information and instructions are included in every new HP LaserJet print cartridge and supplies
package.
Since 1992, HP has offered HP LaserJet supplies return and recycling free of charge. In 2004,
HP Planet Partners for LaserJet Supplies was available in 85% of the world market where
HP LaserJet supplies are sold. Postage-paid and pre-addressed labels are included within the
instruction guide in most HP LaserJet print cartridge boxes. Labels and bulk boxes are also available
through the Web site at http://www.hp.com/recycle.
Use the label to return empty, original HP LaserJet print cartridges only. Please do not use this label
for non-HP cartridges, refilled or remanufactured cartridges, or warranty returns. Printing supplies or
other objects inadvertently sent to the HP Planet Partners program cannot be returned.
More than 10 million HP LaserJet print cartridges were recycled globally in 2004 through the
HP Planet Partners supplies recycling program. This record number represents 26 million pounds of
print cartridge materials diverted from landfills. Worldwide, in 2004, HP recycled an average of 59%
of the print cartridge by weight consisting primarily of plastic and metals. Plastics and metals are
used to make new products such as HP products, plastic trays and spools. The remaining materials
are disposed of in an environmentally responsible manner.
Paper
This product is capable of using recycled papers according to EN 12281:2002. HP recommends the
use of recycled papers that contain not more than 5% ground wood, such as HP Office Recycled
paper.
Material restrictions
This HP product contains mercury in the fluorescent lamp of the control panel liquid crystal display
that might require special handling at end of life.
●
U.S. returns For a more environmentally responsible return of used cartridges and supplies, HP
encourages the use of bulk returns. Simply bundle two or more cartridges together and use the
single, pre-paid, and pre-addressed UPS label that is supplied in the package. For more
information in the U.S., call 1-800-340-2445 or visit the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/recycle.
●
Non-U.S. returns Non-U.S. customers should visit the http://www.hp.com/recycle Web site for
information regarding availability of the HP Supplies Returns and Recycling Program.
This HP product contains a battery that might require special handling at end of life.
Type
Carbon monofluoride lithium battery
Weight
8 grams
Location
Formatter board
User removable
No
For recycling information, you can contact http://www.hp.com/go/recycle or contact your local
authorities or the Electronics Industry Alliance at http://www.eiae.org.
34
Chapter 1
Product information
ENWW
Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European
Union
This symbol on the product or on its packaging indicates that this product must not be disposed of
with your other household waste. Instead, it is your responsibility to dispose of your waste equipment
by handing it over to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic
equipment. The separate collection and recycling of your waste equipment at the time of disposal will
help to conserve natural resources and ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human
health and the environment. For more information about where you can drop off your waste
equipment for recycling, please contact your local city office, your household waste disposal service
or the shop where you purchased the product.
Material safety data sheet
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) can be obtained by contacting the HP LaserJet Supplies Web
site at http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/community/environment/productinfo/safety.htm.
For more information
To obtain information about the following environmental topics, visit http://www.hp.com/go/
environment or http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/community/environment/productinfo/safety.
ENWW
●
Product environmental profile sheet for this and many related HP products
●
HP's commitment to the environment
●
HP's environmental management system
Regulatory information
35
●
HP's end-of-life product return and recycling program
●
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS)
Country/region-specific safety statements
Laser safety statement
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration
has implemented regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is
mandatory for products marketed in the United States. The MFP is certified as a "Class 1" laser
product under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance
Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968.
Since radiation emitted inside the MFP is completely confined within protective housings and
external covers, the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user operation.
WARNING! Using controls, making adjustments, or performing procedures other than those
specified in this user guide may result in exposure to hazardous radiation.
Canadian DOC statement
Complies with Canadian EMC Class B requirements.
«Conforme à la classe B des normes canadiennes de compatibilité électromagnétiques (CEM).»
Japanese VCCI statement
36
Chapter 1
Product information
ENWW
Korean EMI statement
Japanese cordset statement
Taiwan safety statement
ENWW
Regulatory information
37
Finnish laser statement
LASERTURVALLISUUS
LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE
KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT
HP LaserJet 4370mfp, HP LaserJet 4730x mfp, HP LaserJet 4730xs mfp, HP LaserJet
4730xm mfp -laserkirjoitin on käyttäjän kannalta turvallinen luokan 1 laserlaite.
Normaalissa käytössä kirjoittimen suojakotelointi estää lasersäteen pääsyn laitteen
ulkopuolelle.
Laitteen turvallisuusluokka on määritetty standardin EN60825-1 (1994) mukaisesti.
VAROITUS!
Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa
käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle.
VARNING!
Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i bruksanvisning specificerats, kan användaren
utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning, som överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1.
HUOLTO
HP LaserJet 4370mfp, HP LaserJet 4730x mfp, HP LaserJet 4730xs mfp, HP LaserJet
4730xm mfp -kirjoittimen sisällä ei ole käyttäjän huollettavissa olevia kohteita. Laitteen saa
avata ja huoltaa ainoastaan sen huoltamiseen koulutettu henkilö. Tällaiseksi
huoltotoimenpiteeksi ei katsota väriainekasetin vaihtamista, paperiradan puhdistusta tai
muita käyttäjän käsikirjassa lueteltuja, käyttäjän tehtäväksi tarkoitettuja ylläpitotoimia, jotka
voidaan suorittaa ilman erikoistyökaluja.
VARO!
Mikäli kirjoittimen suojakotelo avataan, olet alttiina näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle laitteen
ollessa toiminnassa. Älä katso säteeseen.
VARNING!
Om laserprinterns skyddshölje öppnas då apparaten är i funktion, utsättas användaren för
osynlig laserstrålning. Betrakta ej strålen.
Tiedot laitteessa käytettävän laserdiodin säteilyominaisuuksista:
Aallonpituus 770-800 nm
Teho 5 mW
Luokan 3B laser
Australia
This equipment complies with Australian EMC requirements.
38
Chapter 1
Product information
ENWW
Declaration of conformity (HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp)
Declaration of Conformity
according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014
Manufacturer's Name:
Manufacturer's Address:
Hewlett-Packard Company
11311 Chinden Boulevard,
Boise, Idaho 83714-1021, USA
declares that the product
Product Name:
HP Color LaserJet 4730 MFP, 4730x MFP, 4730xs MFP, 4730xm MFP
Product Numbers:
Q7517A, Q7518A, Q7519A, Q7520A
Regulatory Model Number:
Product Options:
Including accessories: Q7521A, Q7522A, Q7523A, BOISB-0308-00
BOISB-0503-004)
ALL
Toner Cartridge: Q6460A, Q6461A, Q6462A, Q6463A
conforms to the following Product Specifications:
Safety:
IEC 60950-1:2001 / EN60950-1: 2001
IEC 60825-1:1993 +A1 +A2 / EN 60825-1:1994 +A11 +A2 (Class 1 Laser/LED Product)
GB4943-2001
EMC:
CISPR 22:1997 / EN 55022:1998 - Class A1)
EN 61000-3-2:2000
EN 61000-3-3:1995 + A1:2001
EN 55024:1998+A1:2001
FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class A / ICES-003, Issue 42)
GB9254-1998
TELECOM:
TBR-21:1998; EG 201 121:1998
Supplementary Information:
The product herewith complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC, the
R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC (Annex II) and carries the CE-Marking accordingly.
1) The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett-Packard Personal Computer Systems. Compliance testing of product to
standard with exception of Clause 9.5, which is not yet in effect.
2) This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
3) For regulatory purposes, this product is assigned a Regulatory model number (BOISB-0503-00). This number should not be confused
with the product name or the product number(s).
4) All worldwide modular approvals for analog fax accessory obtained by Hewlett-Packard under the regulatory model number
BOISB-0308–00 incorporate the Multi-Tech Systems MT5634SMI Socket Modem Module.
Boise, Idaho 83713, USA
21 December, 2004
For regulatory topics only:
Australia Contact:
Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Australia Ltd.,, 31-41 Joseph Street, Blackburn, Victoria 3130,
Australia
European Contact:
Your Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett-Packard GmbH, Department HQ-TRE /
Standards Europe, Herrenberger Strasse 140, D-71034 Böblingen, Germany, (FAX: +49-7031-14-3143)
USA Contact:
Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company, PO Box 15, Mail Stop 160, Boise, ID 83707-0015,
USA, (Phone: 208-396-6000)
ENWW
Declaration of conformity (HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp)
39
40
Chapter 1
Product information
ENWW
2
Service approach
This chapter contains information about the following topics:
ENWW
●
Service approach
●
Parts and supplies
●
HP available services
●
Hewlett-Packard Limited Warranty Statement
●
Print Cartridge Limited Warranty Statement
●
HP maintenance agreements
41
Service approach
MFP repair normally begins by using the MFP internal diagnostics and the following three-step
process.
1.
Isolate the problem to the major system (for example, the host computer, the network or server,
or the MFP system).
2.
Determine if the problem is located in the accessories, the scanner assembly, or in the MFP
engine.
3.
Troubleshoot the problem using the procedures in Chapter 7.
After a faulty part is located, the MFP can usually be repaired at the assembly level by replacing field
replaceable units (FRUs). Some mechanical assemblies might need to be repaired at the
subassembly level. Hewlett-Packard does not support replacement of components on the printed
circuit assembles.
42
Chapter 2
Service approach
ENWW
Parts and supplies
Field-replaceable part and accessory part numbers are found in chapter 8 of this manual. Order
replacement parts from Hewlett-Packard Customer Support-Americas (HPCS-A) or Hewlett-Packard
Customer Support-Europe (HPCS-E).
CAUTION Use only accessories specifically designed for this MFP. Accessories can be
ordered from an authorized service or support provider.
Ordering parts, supplies, and accessories over the Internet
To order supplies in the US, contact http://www.hp.com/go/ljsupplies. To order supplies worldwide,
see http://www.hp.com/ghp/buyonline.html. To order accessories, see http://www.hp.com.
Ordering directly through the embedded Web server (for MFPs
with network connections)
Use the following steps to order printing supplies directly through the embedded Web server.
1.
In the Web browser on the computer, type the IP address for the MFP. The MFP status window
appears. Or, go to the URL provided in the alert email.
2.
Click Other Links.
3.
Click Order Supplies. The browser opens to a page in which you can choose to send
information about the MFP to HP. You also have the option to order supplies without sending
the MFP information to HP.
4.
Select the part numbers you want to order and follow the instructions on the screen.
Exchange program
HP offers remanufactured assemblies for some parts. These are identified in chapter 8 and can be
ordered from Hewlett-Packard Customer Support-Americas (HPCS-A) or Hewlett-Packard Customer
Support-Europe (HPCS-E).
Supplies
Paper and print cartridges can be ordered directly from Hewlett-Packard. See chapter 8 for ordering
information.
World Wide Web
Printer drivers, updated HP printer software, and product and support information can be obtained
from the following URL:
In the U.S.: http://www.hp.com/support/clj4730mfp
Printer drivers can be obtained from the following sites:
In China: ftp://www.hp.com.cn/support/clj4730mfp
In Japan: ftp://www.jpn.hp.com/support/clj4730mfp
In Korea: http://www.hp.co.kr/support/clj4730mfp
ENWW
Parts and supplies
43
In Taiwan: http://www.hp.com.tw/support/clj4730mfp
or the local driver Web site: http://www.dds.com.tw
HP Service Parts Information
Parts identification and pricing information can also be found on the World Wide Web at
http://www.hp.com/go/HPparts.
44
Chapter 2
Service approach
ENWW
HP available services
Online services
For 24-hour access to information using a modem or Internet connection:
World Wide Web URL: for the HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp series MFPs, updated HP printer
software, product and support information, and printer drivers in several languages can be obtained
from http://www.hp.com/support/clj4730mfp. (Sites are in English.)
Visit: http://www.hp.com/support/net_printing for information about network printing using
HP Jetdirect print servers.
HP Instant Support Professional Edition (ISPE) is a suite of Web-based troubleshooting tools for
desktop computing and printing products. ISPE helps you quickly identify, diagnose, and resolve
computing and printing problems. The ISPE tools may be accessed from http://instantsupport.hp.com.
Telephone support
HP provides free telephone support during the warranty period. When you call, you will be connected
to a responsive team waiting to help you. For the telephone number for your country/region, see the
flyer that shipped in the box with the product, or visit http://welcome.hp.com/us/en/wwcontact.html.
Before calling HP have the following information ready: product name and serial number, date of
purchase, and description of the problem.
You can also find support on the Internet at http://www.hp.com. Click the support & drivers block.
Software utilities, drivers, and electronic information
Visit: http://www.hp.com/go/clj4730mfp_software for the HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp series MFPs.
The Web page for the drivers might be in English, but you can download the drivers themselves in
several languages.
Call: See the flyer that shipped in the box with the MFP.
HP direct ordering for accessories or supplies
In the United States, supplies can be ordered from http://www.hp.com/sbso/product/supplies. In
Canada, supplies can be ordered from http://www.hp.ca/catalog/supplies. In Europe, supplies can be
ordered from http://www.hp.com/go/ljsupplies. In Asia-Pacific, supplies can be ordered from
http://www.hp.com/paper/.
Accessories can be ordered from http://www.hp.com/go/accessories.
HP service information
To locate HP-authorized dealers, call 1-800-243-9816 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-3867 (Canada). For
service for your product, call the customer support number for your country/region. See the flyer that
shipped in the box with the MFP.
HP service agreements
Call: 1-800-835-4747 (U.S.) or 1-800-268-1221 (Canada).
Extended Service: 1-800-446-0522
HP support and information for Macintosh computers
ENWW
HP available services
45
Visit: http://www.hp.com/go/macosx for Macintosh OS X support information and HP subscription
service for driver updates.
Visit: http://www.hp.com/go/mac-connect for products designed specifically for the Macintosh user.
46
Chapter 2
Service approach
ENWW
Hewlett-Packard Limited Warranty Statement
HP product
Duration of Limited Warranty
HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp
1 year, on-site
HP Color LaserJet 4730x mfp
HP Color LaserJet 4730xs mfp
HP Color LaserJet 4730xm mfp
HP warrants HP hardware, accessories, and supplies against defects in materials and workmanship
for the period specified above. If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP
will, at its option, either repair or replace products which prove to be defective. Replacement
products may be either new or like-new.
HP warrants that HP software will not fail to execute its programming instructions, for the period
specified above, due to defects in material and workmanship when properly installed and used. If HP
receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will replace software media which
does not execute its programming instructions due to such defects.
HP does not warrant that the operation of HP products will be uninterrupted or error free. If HP is
unable, within a reasonable time, to repair or replace any product to a condition as warranted,
customer will be entitled to a refund of the purchase price upon prompt return of the product.
HP products may contain remanufactured parts equivalent to new in performance or may have been
subject to incidental use.
Warranty does not apply to defects resulting from (a) improper or inadequate maintenance or
calibration, (b) software, interfacing, parts or supplies not supplied by HP, (c) unauthorized
modification or misuse, (d) operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the
product, or (e) improper site preparation or maintenance.
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND
NO OTHER WARRANTY, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP
SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE REMEDIES IN THIS WARRANTY
STATEMENT ARE THE CUSTOMER’S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES. EXCEPT AS
INDICATED ABOVE, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF
DATA OR FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT
OR DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE.
FOR CONSUMER TRANSACTIONS IN AUSTRALIA AND NEW ZEALAND; THE WARRANTY
TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY PERMITTED,
DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY
STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU.
The warranty period begins on the date of the delivery or on the date of installation if installed by HP.
If customer schedules or delays HP installation more than 30 days after delivery, warranty begins on
the 31st day from delivery.
ENWW
Hewlett-Packard Limited Warranty Statement
47
Print Cartridge Limited Warranty Statement
This HP Print Cartridge is warranted to be free from defects in materials and workmanship.
This warranty does not apply to print cartridges that (a) have been refilled, refurbished,
remanufactured or tampered with in any way, (b) experience problems resulting from misuse,
improper storage, or operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the printer
product or (c) exhibit wear from ordinary use.
To obtain warranty service, please return the product to place of purchase (with a written description
of the problem and print samples) or contact HP customer support. At HP’s option, HP will either
replace products that prove to be defective or refund your purchase price.
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND NO
OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE
LIABLE FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT
OR DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE.
THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT
LAWFULLY PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION
TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT
TO YOU.
48
Chapter 2
Service approach
ENWW
HP maintenance agreements
HP has several types of maintenance agreements that meet a wide range of support needs.
Maintenance agreements are not part of the standard warranty. Support services vary by location.
Contact HP Customer Care or go to http://www.hp.com/services/carepack to determine the services
that are available and for more information about maintenance agreements. In general, the MFP will
have the following maintenance agreements:
Priority Onsite Service
This agreement provides 4-hour service response to the customer's site for calls made during normal
HP business hours.
Next business day
This agreement provides next-business-day service, Monday through Friday. This service agreement
comes standard with the MFP for a period of one year. The customer can purchase an extension of
this agreement.
Installation and maintenance kit replacement
An HP-authorized service or support provider will come to the customer's site to install the MFP or to
replace the maintenance kits.
ENWW
HP maintenance agreements
49
50
Chapter 2
Service approach
ENWW
3
Installation and configuration
This chapter contains information about the following topics:
ENWW
●
Installation checklist
●
Unpacking the MFP
●
Loading detectable standard-sized media into Tray 2, 3, and 4
●
Loading undetectable standard-sized media into Tray 2, 3, and 4
●
Connecting power
●
Installing print cartridges
●
Installing a new control panel overlay
●
Testing the MFP operation
●
Sleep delay
●
Connecting to a computer or network
●
Printer software
●
Printer drivers
●
Printer drivers for Macintosh computers
●
Software for Macintosh computers
●
Network configuration
●
Security features
●
Optional output and input devices
51
Installation checklist
When setting up the MFP for the first time, perform the following tasks to ensure that the MFP is
installed correctly.
Table 3-1 HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp installation
52
Chapter 3
Item
Details
Verify that the MFP is connected to an
adequate power source.
A minimum of 10A (110V) or 5A (220V) circuit
required. Uninterruptible Power Supplies (UPS)
are not recommended. Do not use a power
strip. Any devices attached to the same power
source can lead to intermittent problems.
Verify that MFP resides in an adequate space.
Adequate space so that the MFP may be
accessed from all sides. Tight space makes the
system difficult to access for jam clearing and
service.
Verify that surface has adequate, level support.
Ensure the MFP is on a level and stable
surface. Ensure wheel locks are engaged.
Verify that all orange tape and packaging
materials have been removed.
See details in the HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp
series Getting Started Guide.
Verify that the print cartridges and paper have
been installed in the MFP.
Use known good quality paper.
Verify the I/O cable, such as a LAN, USB, or
parallel cable, has been connected to the
corresponding I/O port on the MFP.
See details in the HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp
series Getting Started Guide.
Verify the scanner shipping lock has been
moved to the unlocked position.
See details in the HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp
series Getting Started Guide.
Verify the correct language and date/time are
set.
See details in the HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp
series Getting Started Guide.
Configure the e-mail gateways.
Press Menu, scroll to and touch Configure
Device, Sending, E-MAIL, and FIND
GATEWAYS. If auto-discovery does not find
the e-mail gateways, obtain the addresses from
your network administrator and manually
configure these on the MFP.
If the fax accessory is installed, ensure it is
properly configured.
Press Menu, scroll to and touch Fax, and then
FAX SETUP SETTINGS. Fill in the date/time,
location and fax header information. See
details in the HP LaserJet Analog Fax
Accessory 300 User Guide.
Print the configuration pages.
Press Menu, touch Information, and then touch
PRINT CONFIGURATION.
On the configuration page printouts, verify the
following:
The HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp information
and training CD provides detailed information
on how to read the configuration page.
●
LDAP gateway address displays.
●
SMTP gateway address displays.
●
All optional devices display (for example,
the stapler/stacker or the 3-bin mailbox).
Installation and configuration
ENWW
Table 3-1 HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp installation (continued)
Item
ENWW
Details
●
If the fax accessory is installed, the
modem status reads Operational/Enabled.
●
On the Embedded Jetdirect Page, verify
that the status reads I/O Card Ready and
that you have a valid IP address.
Verify you can copy from the copier glass of
the MFP.
Place configuration page face down on copier
glass and press Start.
Verify you can copy from the Automatic
Document Feeder (ADF).
Place configuration page face up in ADF and
press Start.
Verify you can send a fax from the MFP, if the
fax accessory is installed.
Place document face-up in the ADF and use
the keypad to send to a known functioning fax
number.
Verify you can send an e-mail.
Place document face-up in the ADF, and use
the keypad to enter an e-mail address (LDAP
must be configured for this to function).
Verify you can print to the MFP.
After loading the printing system software on a
networked computer, print a test page from the
driver.
Verify that all users have access to the User
Training.
http://www.hp.com/go/usemymfp
Installation checklist
53
Unpacking the MFP
NOTE Save all the packing materials in case you need to repack and transport the MFP at a
later date.
WARNING! The HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp series MFP weighs approximately 124 kg
(273 lb). HP recommends having three or more people move or position the MFP.
54
1.
Remove the top of the box and remove the outer cardboard wrapping from the sides of the
MFP. Remove the ramps, power supply cord, CD-ROM, and user documentation from the top of
the packing box.
2.
Remove the corner brackets.
Chapter 3
Installation and configuration
ENWW
ENWW
3.
Remove the inner cardboard frame and foam corner packaging, and install the ramps.
4.
Remove the shipping blocks and plastic bag that surround the MFP.
Unpacking the MFP
55
5.
Roll the MFP down the ramps into the prepared location.
CAUTION Do not attempt to move the MFP by yourself. At least two people must move
the MFP into the prepared location. While two people can move the MFP, using three or
four people to unpack and install the MFP is easier and safer.
56
6.
Remove the packing tape from the front and rear of the MFP.
7.
Open the scanner glass and remove the foam packaging.
8.
Clean the scanner glass by wiping it gently with a clean, slightly damp, lint-free cloth.
Chapter 3
Installation and configuration
ENWW
9.
ENWW
Unlock the scanner.
Unpacking the MFP
57
Loading detectable standard-sized media into Tray 2, 3,
and 4
CAUTION If paper is loaded in Trays 2 through 4 when the MFP is in Sleep mode, the new
paper will not be sensed when the MFP comes out of Sleep mode. This could cause the
wrong paper to be used for a print job. Be sure to wake the MFP before loading paper in these
trays.
The following detectable standard-sized media is supported in Trays 2 through 4: letter, legal,
executive, A4, A5, and (JIS) B5.
CAUTION Do not print cardstock, envelopes, heavy or extra-heavy paper, or unsupported
sizes of media from the 500-sheet trays. Print on these types of media only from Tray 1. Do
not overfill the input tray or open it while it is in use. Doing so can cause jams in the MFP.
58
1.
Slide open the tray from the MFP.
2.
Adjust the rear media-length guide by squeezing the guide adjustment latch and sliding the
back of the tray to the length of the media being used.
Chapter 3
Installation and configuration
ENWW
3.
Slide the media-width guides open to the size for the media you are using.
4.
Load media into the tray face up.
NOTE For best performance, load the tray completely full without splitting or fanning the
ream of paper. Splitting or fanning the ream might cause a multi-feed problem, which
could result in a paper jam. The capacity of the paper tray can vary. For example, if using
75 g/m2 (20 lb) paper, the tray holds a full ream of 500 sheets. If the media is heavier
than 75 g/m2 (20 lb), the tray will not hold a full ream, and the number of sheets must be
reduced accordingly. Do not overfill the tray because the MFP might not pick up the paper.
NOTE If the tray is not properly adjusted, the MFP might display an error message or
the media might jam.
NOTE If duplex printing, place the paper face-down.
5.
ENWW
Slide the tray into the MFP. The MFP will display the tray’s media type and size. If the
configuration is not correct, press OK on the product control panel. If the configuration is correct,
touch Exit.
Loading detectable standard-sized media into Tray 2, 3, and 4
59
Loading undetectable standard-sized media into Tray 2,
3, and 4
Undetectable standard-sized media sizes are not marked in the tray, but are listed in the Size menu
for the tray.
The following undetectable standard-sized media is supported in the 500-sheet trays: executive
(JIS), 8.5 x 13, double Japan postcard, and 16K.
CAUTION Do not print cardstock, envelopes, heavy or extra-heavy paper, or unsupported
sizes of media from the 500-sheet trays. Print on these types of media only from Tray 1. Do
not overfill the input tray or open it while it is in use. Doing so can cause paper jams.
60
1.
Slide open the tray from the MFP.
2.
Adjust the rear media-length guide by squeezing the guide adjustment latch and sliding the
back of the tray to the length of the media being used.
Chapter 3
Installation and configuration
ENWW
3.
Slide the media-width guides open to the size for the media you are using.
4.
Load media into the tray face-up.
NOTE For best performance, load the tray completely full without splitting or fanning the
ream of paper. Splitting or fanning the ream might cause a multi-feed problem, which
could result in a paper jam. The capacity of the paper tray can vary. For example, if using
75 g/m2 (20 lb) paper, the tray holds a full ream of 500 sheets. If the media is heavier
than 75 g/m2 (20 lb), the tray will not hold a full ream, and the number of sheets must be
reduced accordingly. Do not overfill the tray because the MFP might not pick up the paper.
NOTE If the tray is not properly adjusted, the MFP might display an error message or
the media might jam.
NOTE If duplex printing, place the paper face-down.
ENWW
Loading undetectable standard-sized media into Tray 2, 3, and 4
61
5.
62
Slide the tray into the MFP. The MFP will display the tray’s media type and size. If the
configuration is not correct, touch OK on the product control panel and select the correct size.
Chapter 3
Installation and configuration
ENWW
Connecting power
ENWW
1.
Plug the AC power cord into the MFP and into the power outlet.
2.
Turn the MFP on.
Connecting power
63
Installing print cartridges
For additional information on installing and managing print cartridges, see Managing print cartridges
on page 108.
1.
Open the covers on the right side of the MFP.
CAUTION The fuser might be hot.
2.
Grasp the green handle and pull down the ETB.
CAUTION Do not place any item on the transfer belt while it is open. If the belt is
punctured, print quality problems could result.
64
Chapter 3
Installation and configuration
ENWW
3.
Remove the used print cartridge from the MFP.
4.
Remove the new print cartridge from the bag. Place the used print cartridge in the bag for
recycling.
5.
Align the print cartridge with the tracks inside the MFP and insert the cartridge until it is
completely seated.
NOTE The print cartridge tape seal is removed automatically when the print cartridge is
installed in the MFP.
NOTE If a cartridge is in the wrong slot, the product control panel will display the
message INCORRECT [COLOR] CARTRIDGE.
6.
Close the front cover and then close the top cover. After a short while, the product control panel
should display Ready.
7.
Installation is complete. Place the used print cartridge in the box in which the new cartridge
arrived. See the enclosed recycling guide for recycling instructions.
8.
If a non-HP print cartridge was installed, check the product control panel for further instructions.
For additional help, go to http://www.hp.com/support/clj4730mfp.
ENWW
Installing print cartridges
65
Installing a new control panel overlay
Some MFP models are shipped without the product control panel overlay installed or a different
overlay may be used from the one that is installed. Overlays are available for several languages. If
setting up an MFP for a language other than English, follow this procedure.
1.
Remove the backing from the adhesive side of the label.
2.
Position the new label over the top of the product control panel.
3.
Press the label firmly down onto the control panel.
NOTE When applying the overlay, start at the center and press the overlay into place
towards the edges of the control panel.
66
4.
Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
5.
Scroll to and touch Configure Device.
6.
Scroll to and touch SYSTEM SETUP.
7.
Scroll to and touch LANGUAGE.
8.
Scroll to and touch the desired language.
9.
Press Menu.
Chapter 3
Installation and configuration
ENWW
Testing the MFP operation
Print a configuration page to ensure that the MFP is working correctly.
1.
Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2.
Scroll to and touch Information.
3.
Scroll to and touch PRINT CONFIGURATION.
The message Printing... CONFIGURATION appears on the display until the MFP finishes printing
the configuration page. The MFP returns to the Ready state after printing the configuration page.
NOTE If the MFP is configured with an HP Jetdirect print server or a paper handling device,
an additional configuration page will print that provides information about those devices.
ENWW
Testing the MFP operation
67
Sleep delay
The adjustable Sleep mode feature reduces power consumption when the MFP has been inactive for
an extended period. The length of time before the MFP enters Sleep mode can be set to 1 MINUTE,
15 MINUTES, 30 MINUTES, 45 MINUTES, 60 MINUTES, 90 MINUTES, 2 HOURS, or 4 HOURS.
The default setting is 30 MINUTES.
NOTE The MFP display dims when the MFP is in Sleep mode. This mode does not affect
MFP warm-up time.
Setting Sleep delay
1.
Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2.
Scroll to and touch Configure Device.
3.
Scroll to and touch SYSTEM SETUP.
4.
Scroll to and touch SLEEP DELAY.
5.
Scroll to and touch the desired sleep-delay period. The settings are saved and the control panel
returns to the SYSTEM SETUP menu.
6.
Press Menu.
CAUTION If paper is loaded in Trays 2, 3, or 4 when the MFP is in Sleep mode, the
new paper will not be sensed when the MFP comes out of Sleep mode. This could cause
the wrong paper to be used for a print job. Be sure to wake the MFP before loading
paper in these trays.
Disabling/enabling Sleep mode
68
1.
Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2.
Scroll to and touch Configure Device.
3.
Scroll to and touch RESETS.
4.
Press SLEEP MODE.
5.
Scroll to and touch ON or OFF. The settings are saved.
6.
Press Menu.
Chapter 3
Installation and configuration
ENWW
Connecting to a computer or network
The MFP has eight ports for connecting to a computer or a network. The ports are at the right rear
corner of the MFP.
1
Foreign interface harness (FIH)
2
USB 2.0
3
Host USB (This accessory port uses host USB protocol.)
4
Fax connection (for connecting to an optional analog fax accessory)
5
Parallel port
6
EIO interface expansion slot
7
Kensington lock
8
Network connection (embedded HP Jetdirect print server)
9
Accessory port
Network connection
When installing the MFP on a network, connect the network cable to the embedded HP Jetdirect
print server before installing the MFP software.
For complete information about installing the MFP on a network, see the network installation guide
that was included with the MFP.
Parallel connection
Install the MFP software before connecting the MFP directly to a computer or to a print server with a
parallel cable.
For complete information about installing connecting the MFP directly to a print server, see the
network installation guide that was included with the MFP.
ENWW
Connecting to a computer or network
69
Fax connection
The HP Color LaserJet 4730x mfp, HP Color LaserJet 4730xs mfp, and HP Color LaserJet
4730xm mfp models are equipped with an HP LaserJet analog fax accessory already installed.
Windows users can also install the optional HP Digital Sending Software (HP DSS), which provides
digital faxing services.
For complete instructions for configuring the fax accessory and for using the fax features, see the
HP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory 300 User Guide. A printed copy of this guide is provided with the
HP Color LaserJet 4730x mfp, HP Color LaserJet 4730xs mfp, and HP Color LaserJet 4730xm mfp.
Analog faxing
When the analog fax accessory is installed, the MFP can function as a standalone fax machine.
The HP Color LaserJet 4730x mfp, HP Color LaserJet 4730xs mfp, and HP Color LaserJet
4730xm mfp models are equipped with an HP LaserJet analog fax accessory already installed. For
the HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp (base model), this accessory can be ordered as an option.
Connecting the fax accessory to a phone line
When connecting the fax accessory to a phone line, ensure that the phone line being used for the fax
accessory is a dedicated line that is not used by any other devices. Also, this line should be an
analog line because the fax will not function correctly if it is connected to some digital PBX systems.
If unsure whether an analog or digital phone line is to be used, contact your telecom provider.
NOTE HP recommends using the phone cord that comes with the fax accessory to ensure
that the accessory functions correctly.
70
Chapter 3
Installation and configuration
ENWW
Follow these instructions to connect the fax accessory to a phone jack.
1.
Locate the phone cord that is included with the fax accessory kit. Connect one end of the phone
cord into the fax accessory phone jack that is on the formatter. Push the connector until it clicks.
CAUTION Be sure to connect the phone line to the fax accessory port, which is located
in the center of the formatter. Do not connect the phone line to the HP Jetdirect port,
which is nearer the bottom of the formatter.
2.
Connect the other end of the phone cord into the phone jack on the wall. Push the connector
until it clicks.
Configuring and using the fax features
Before the fax features can be used, configure them in the product control panel menus. For
complete information about configuring and using the fax accessory and for information about
troubleshooting problems with the fax accessory, see the HP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory 300
User Guide provided with the fax accessory.
Digital faxing
Digital faxing is available when installing the optional HP Digital Sending Software. For information
about ordering this software, go to http://www.hp.com/go/digitalsending.
With digital faxing, the MFP does not need to be connected directly to a phone line. Instead, the MFP
can send a fax in one of three ways:
●
LAN fax sends faxes through a third-party fax provider.
●
Microsoft Windows 2000 fax is a fax modem and Digital Sender Module on a computer that
allows the computer to operate as a turnkey gateway fax.
●
Internet fax uses an Internet fax provider to process faxes, and the fax is delivered on a
traditional fax machine or sent to the user’s e-mail.
For complete information about using digital faxing, see the documentation that is provided with the
HP Digital Sending Software.
ENWW
Connecting to a computer or network
71
Printer software
Included with the MFP is a CD-ROM containing the printing system software. The software
components and printer drivers on this CD-ROM help to use the MFP to its fullest potential. See the
Getting Started Guide for installation instructions.
NOTE For the latest information about the printing system software components, refer to the
readme file on the Web at http://www.hp.com/support/clj4730mfp. For information about
installing the printer software, view the Install Notes on the CD-ROM included with the MFP.
This section summarizes the software included on the CD-ROM. The printing system includes
software for end users and network administrators operating in the following operating environments:
●
Microsoft Windows 98 and Windows Me
●
Microsoft Windows 2000, XP (32-bit), and Server 2003 (32-bit)
●
Apple Mac OS 9.1 and later and Mac OS 10.2 and later
NOTE For a list of the network environments supported by the network administrator
software components, see Network configuration on page 87.
NOTE For a list of printer drivers, updated HP printer software, and product support
information, go to http://www.hp.com/support/clj4730mfp.
Software
Software features
Automatic Configuration, Update Now, and Preconfiguration features are available with the HP Color
LaserJet 4730mfp series MFP.
Driver Autoconfiguration
The HP LaserJet PCL 6 and PCL 5c drivers for Windows and the PS drivers for Windows 2000 and
Windows XP feature automatic discovery and driver configuration for MFP accessories at the time of
installation. Some accessories that Driver Autoconfiguration supports are the duplexing unit, optional
paper trays, and dual inline memory modules (DIMMs). If the environment supports bidirectional
communication, the installer presents Driver Autoconfiguration as an installable component by
default for a Typical Installation and for a Custom Installation.
Update Now
If the configuration of the HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp MFP has been modified since installation, the
driver can be automatically updated with the new configuration in environments that support
bidirectional communication. Click the Update Now button to automatically reflect the new
configuration in the driver.
NOTE The Update Now feature is not supported in environments where shared
Windows 2000 or Windows XP clients are connected to Windows 2000 or Windows XP hosts.
72
Chapter 3
Installation and configuration
ENWW
HP Driver Preconfiguration
HP Driver Preconfiguration is a software architecture and set of tools that allows HP software to be
customized and distributed in managed corporate printing environments. Using HP Driver
Preconfiguration, information technology (IT) administrators can preconfigure the printing and device
defaults for HP printer drivers before installing the drivers in the network environment. For more
information, see the HP Driver Preconfiguration Support Guide, which is available at
http://www.hp.com/support/clj4730mfp.
Installing the printing system software
The following sections contain instructions for installing the printing system software.
The MFP comes with printing system software and printer drivers on a CD-ROM. The printing system
software on the CD-ROM must be installed to take full advantage of the MFP features.
If a CD-ROM drive is not available, download the printing system software from the Internet at
http://www.hp.com/support/clj4730mfp.
NOTE Obtain Model Scripts for UNIX® and Linux by downloading them from the Internet or
by requesting them from an HP-authorized service or support provider. For Linux support see
http://www.hp.com/go/linux. For UNIX support see http://www.hp.com/go/jetdirectunix_software.
Download the latest software free of charge at http://www.hp.com/support/clj4730mfp.
Installing Windows printing system software for direct connections
This section explains how to install the printing system software for Microsoft Windows 98,
Windows Me, Windows 2000, and Windows XP.
When installing the printing software in a direct-connect environment, always install the software
before connecting the parallel or USB cable. If the parallel or USB cable was connected before the
software installation, see Installing the software after the parallel or USB cable has been connected
on page 75.
Either a parallel or USB cable can be used for the direct connection. However, parallel and USB
cables cannot be connected at the same time. Use an IEEE 1284-compatible cable or a standard 2meter USB cable.
Installing the printing system software
1.
Close all software programs that are open or running.
2.
Insert the MFP CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
If the welcome screen does not open, start it by using the following procedure:
ENWW
●
On the Start menu, click Run.
●
Type the following: X:\setup (where X is the letter of the CD-ROM drive).
●
Click OK.
3.
When prompted, click Install Printer and follow the instructions on the computer screen.
4.
Click Finish when the installation has completed.
Printer software
73
5.
The computer may need to be restarted.
6.
Print a Test Page or a page from any software program to make sure that the software is
correctly installed.
If installation fails, reinstall the software. If this fails, check the installation notes and readme files on
the MFP CD-ROM or the flyer that came with the product, or go to http://www.hp.com/support/
clj4730mfp for help or more information.
Installing Windows printing system software for networks
The software on the MFP CD-ROM supports network installation with a Microsoft network. For
network installation on other operating systems, go to http://www.hp.com/support/clj4730mfp.
The HP Jetdirect embedded print server in the HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp includes a 10/100 BaseTX network port. For other available HP Jetdirect print servers, see Parts and supplies on page 43 or
go to http://www.hp.com/support/clj4730mfp.
The installer does not support MFP installation or MFP object creation on Novell servers. It supports
only direct-mode network installations between Windows computers and an MFP. To install the MFP
and create objects on a Novell server, use an HP utility (such as HP Web Jetadmin) or a Novell utility
(such as NWAdmin).
Installing the printing system software
1.
If installing the software on Windows 2000 or Windows XP, administrative privileges are required.
2.
Make sure that the HP Jetdirect print server and MFP are properly connected to the network.
Print a configuration page (see Testing the MFP operation on page 67). On the second page of
the configuration page, locate the IP address that is currently configured. This address may be
needed to initially identify the MFP on the network and complete the installation.
3.
Close all software programs that are open or running.
4.
Insert the MFP CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
If the welcome screen does not open, start it by using the following procedure:
●
On the Start menu, click Run.
●
Type the following: X:\setup (where X is the letter of the CD-ROM drive).
●
Click OK.
5.
When prompted, click Install Printer and follow the instructions on the computer screen.
6.
Click Finish when installation has completed.
7.
The computer may need to be restarted.
8.
Print a Test Page or a page from any software program to make sure that the software is
correctly installed.
If installation fails, reinstall the software. If this fails, check the installation notes and readme
files on the MFP CD-ROM or the flyer that came with the product, or go to http://www.hp.com/
support/clj4730mfp for help or more information.
74
Chapter 3
Installation and configuration
ENWW
Setting up a Windows computer to use the network MFP with Windows-sharing
If the computer will print directly to the MFP, share the MFP on the network so that other network
users can print to it.
See the Windows documentation that came with the operating system to enable Windows-sharing.
After the MFP is shared, install the printer software on all computers that share the MFP.
Installing the software after the parallel or USB cable has been connected
If you have already connected a parallel or USB cable to a Windows computer, the New Hardware
Found dialog box appears when you turn on the computer.
Installing the software for Windows 98 or Windows Me
1.
In the New Hardware Found dialog box, click Search CD-ROM drive.
2.
Click Next.
3.
Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
4.
Print a Test Page or a page from any software program to make sure that the software is
correctly installed.
If installation fails, reinstall the software. If this fails, check the installation notes and readme
files on the MFP CD-ROM or the flyer that came with the product, or go to http://www.hp.com/
support/clj4730mfp for help or more information.
Installing the software for Windows 2000 or Windows XP
1.
In the New Hardware Found dialog box, click Search.
2.
On the Locate Driver Files screen, select the Specify a Location check box, clear all other
check boxes, and then click Next.
3.
Type the letter for the root directory. For example, X:\ (where "X:\" is the letter of the root
directory on the CD-ROM drive).
4.
Click Next.
5.
Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
6.
Click Finish when installation has completed.
7.
Select a language and follow the instructions on the computer screen.
8.
Print a Test Page or a page from any software program to make sure that the software is
correctly installed.
If installation fails, reinstall the software. If this fails, check the installation notes and readme
files on the MFP CD-ROM or the flyer that came with the product, or go to http://www.hp.com/
support/clj4730mfp for help or more information.
Uninstalling the software
This section explains how to uninstall the printing system software.
ENWW
Printer software
75
Removing software from Windows operating systems
Use the Uninstaller in the HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp/Tools program group to select and remove
any or all of the Windows HP printing system components.
1.
Click Start and then click Programs.
2.
Point to HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp and then click Tools.
3.
Click Uninstaller.
4.
Click Yes.
5.
Follow the instructions on the computer screen to complete the uninstallation.
Software for networks
For a summary of available HP network installation and configuration software solutions, see the
HP Jetdirect Print Server Administrator’s Guide. You can find this guide on the CD-ROM included
with the MFP.
HP Web Jetadmin
HP Web Jetadmin allows users to manage HP Jetdirect-connected printers within their intranet using
a Web browser. HP Web Jetadmin is a browser-based management tool, and should be installed
only on a single network administration server. It can be installed and run on these systems:
●
Fedora Core and SuSe Linux
●
Windows 2000 Professional, Server, and Advanced Server
●
Windows XP Professional Service Pack 1
●
Windows Server 2003
When installed on a host server, HP Web Jetadmin can be accessed by any client through a
supported web browser, such as Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 and 6.0 or Netscape Navigator 7.0.
HP Web Jetadmin has the following features:
76
●
Task-oriented user interface provides configurable views, saving network managers significant
time.
●
Customizable user profiles let network administrators include only the function viewed or used.
●
Instant e-mail notification of hardware failure, low supplies, and other MFP problems can be
routed to different people.
●
Remote installation and management from anywhere using only a standard Web browser.
●
Advanced autodiscovery locates peripherals on the network, without manually entering each
printer into a database.
●
Simple integration into enterprise management packages.
●
Ability to quickly find peripherals based on parameters such as IP address, color capability, and
model name.
Chapter 3
Installation and configuration
ENWW
●
Ability to easily organize peripherals into logical groups, with virtual office maps for easy
navigation.
●
Ability to manage and configure multiple printers at once.
To download a current version of HP Web Jetadmin and to see the latest list of supported host
systems, visit HP Customer Care Online at http://www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin.
UNIX
The HP Jetdirect Printer Installer for UNIX is a simple printer installation utility for HP-UX and Solaris
networks. It is available for download from HP Customer Care Online at http://www.hp.com/go/
jetdirectunix_software.
Utilities
The HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp is equipped with several utilities, which make it easy to monitor and
manage the MFP on a network.
HP Easy Printer Care Software
The HP Easy Printer Care Software is a software program that you can use for the following tasks:
●
Viewing color usage information
●
Checking the printer status
●
Checking the supplies status
●
Setting up alerts
●
Viewing printer documentation
●
Gaining access to troubleshooting and maintenance tools
You can view the HP Easy Printer Care Software when the printer is directly connected to your
computer or when it is connected to a network. Perform a complete software installation in order to
use the HP Easy Printer Care Software.
For more information on HP Easy Printer Care Software, see Using the HP Easy Printer Care
Software on page 636 or visit http://www.hp.com/go/easyprintercare.
Embedded Web server
This MFP is equipped with an embedded Web server, which allows access to information about the
MFP and network activities. A Web server provides an environment in which web programs may run,
much in the same way that an operating system, such as Windows, provides an environment for
programs to run on your computer. The output from these programs can then be displayed by a Web
browser, such as Microsoft Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator.
When a Web server is "embedded", that means it resides on a hardware device (such as a printer) or
in firmware, rather than as software that is loaded on a network server.
The advantage of an embedded Web server is that it provides an interface to the MFP that anyone
can access with a network-connected computer or a standard Web browser. There is no special
software to install or configure. For more information about the HP embedded Web server, see the
Embedded Web Server User Guide. This guide is on the CD-ROM included with the MFP.
ENWW
Printer software
77
Features
The HP embedded Web server allows users to view MFP and network card status and manage
printing functions from their computer. With the HP embedded Web server, users can do the following:
●
View MFP status information.
●
Determine the remaining life on all supplies and order new ones.
●
View and change tray configurations.
●
View and change the MFP product control panel menu configuration.
●
View and print internal pages.
●
Receive notification of MFP and supplies events.
●
Add or customize links to other Web sites.
●
Select the language in which to display the embedded Web server pages.
●
View and change network configuration.
●
Restrict access to color printing.
For a complete explanation of the features and functionality of the embedded Web server, see
Embedded Web server on page 77.
Other components and utilities
Several software applications are available for Windows and Mac OS users, as well as for network
administrators.
78
Windows
Mac OS
Network administrator
●
Software installer — automates
the printing system installation
●
●
●
Online Web registration
PostScript Printer Description files
(PPDs) — for use with the Apple
PostScript drivers that come with
the Mac OS
●
HP Web Jetadmin— a browserbased system management tool.
See http://www.hp.com/go/
webjetadmin for the latest
HP Web Jetadmin software
HP LaserJet Utility (available from
the Internet) — a printer
management utility for Mac OS
users
●
HP Jetdirect Printer Installer for
UNIX — available for download
from http://www.hp.com/support/
net_printing
Chapter 3
Installation and configuration
ENWW
Printer drivers
The product comes with software that allows the computer to communicate with the product (by
using a printer language). This software is called a printer driver. Printer drivers provide access to
product features, such as printing on custom-sized paper, resizing documents, and inserting
watermarks.
Supported printer drivers
The following printer drivers are provided for the product. If the desired printer driver is not on the
product CD-ROM or is not available on http://www.hp.com, contact the manufacturer or distributor of
the program that is being used, and request a driver for the product.
NOTE The most recent drivers are available at http://www.hp.com. Depending on the
configuration of Windows-based computers, the installation program for the product software
automatically checks the computer for Internet access in order to obtain the latest drivers.
Table 3-2 Supported printer drivers
Operating system1
PCL 6 printer
driver
PCL 5 printer
driver
PS printer driver
Microsoft Windows 98
X
X
X
Windows Millennium (Me)
X
X
X
Windows 2000
X
X
X
Windows XP
X
X
X
Windows Server 2003
X
X
X
PPD 2printer
driver
Mac OS 9.1 or later
X
X
Mac OS 10.2 or later
X
X
1
2
Not all product features are available from all drivers or operating systems. See the context-sensitive help in the printer
driver for available features.
PostScript (PS) Printer Description files (PPDs)
Additional drivers
The following drivers are not included on the CD-ROM, but are available from the Internet.
●
OS/2 PCL printer driver.
●
OS/2 PS printer driver.
●
UNIX model scripts.
●
Linux drivers.
●
HP OpenVMS drivers.
NOTE The OS/2 printer drivers are available from IBM.
ENWW
Printer drivers
79
Obtain Model Scripts for UNIX® and Linux by downloading them from the Internet or by requesting
them from an HP-authorized service or support provider. For Linux support see http://www.hp.com/
go/linux. For UNIX support see http://www.hp.com/go/jetdirectunix_software.
Selecting the correct printer driver
Select a printer driver based on the operating system that is being used and the way that the product
is to be used. See the printer driver Help for the features that are available.
●
The PCL 6 printer driver can provide the best overall performance and access to MFP features.
●
The PCL 5 printer driver is recommended for general office monochrome and color printing.
●
Use the PostScript (PS) driver if printing primarily from PostScript-based programs such as
Adobe PhotoShop® and CorelDRAW®, for compatibility with PostScript Level 3 needs, or for PS
flash font support.
NOTE The product automatically switches between PS and PCL printer languages.
Printer driver Help (Windows)
Printer driver Help is separate from program Help. The printer driver Help provides explanations for
the buttons, check boxes, and drop-down lists that are in the printer driver. It also includes
instructions for performing common printing tasks, such as printing on both sides, printing multiple
pages on one sheet, and printing the first page or covers on different paper.
Activate the printer driver Help screens in one of the following ways:
80
●
Click the Help button.
●
Press the F1 key on the computer keyboard.
●
Click the question-mark symbol in the upper-right corner of the printer driver.
●
Right-click on any item in the driver, and then click What's This?.
Chapter 3
Installation and configuration
ENWW
Gaining access to Windows printer drivers
Use one of the following methods to open the printer drivers from the computer:
Table 3-3 Gaining access to Windows printer drivers
Operating System
To change the settings for all
print jobs until the software
program is closed
To change the print job
default settings (for example,
turn on Print on Both Sides
by default)
To change the configuration
settings (for example, add a
tray or enable/disable Manual
Duplexing)
Windows 98 and
Windows
Millennium (Me)
1.
On the File menu in the
software program, click
Print.
1.
Click Start, click Settings,
and then click Printers.
1.
Click Start, click Settings,
and then click Printers.
2.
Select the HP Color
LaserJet 4730mfp, and
then click Properties.
Right-click the HP Color
LaserJet 4730mfp icon,
and then select Properties
(Windows 98 and Me).
2.
2.
Right-click the HP Color
LaserJet 4730mfp icon,
and then select Properties.
3.
Click the Configure tab.
The steps can vary; this
procedure is most common.
Windows 2000, XP,
and Server 2003
1.
On the File menu in the
software program, click
Print.
1.
Click Start, click Settings,
and then click Printers or
Printers and Faxes.
1.
Click Start, click Settings,
and then click Printers or
Printers and Faxes.
2.
Select the HP Color
LaserJet 4730mfp, and
then click Properties or
Preferences.
2.
Right-click the HP Color
LaserJet 4730mfp icon,
and then select Printing
Preferences.
2.
Right-click the HP Color
LaserJet 4730mfp icon,
and then select Properties.
3.
Click the Device Settings
tab.
The steps can vary; this
procedure is most common.
ENWW
Printer drivers
81
Printer drivers for Macintosh computers
The MFP comes with printer driver software that uses a printer language to communicate with the
MFP. Printer drivers provide access to MFP features, such as printing on custom-sized paper,
resizing documents, and inserting watermarks.
Supported Macintosh printer drivers
A Macintosh printer driver and the necessary PPD files are included with the MFP. If the desired
printer driver is not on the MFP CD, check the installation notes and the late-breaking readme files to
see if the printer driver is supported. If it is not supported, contact the manufacturer or distributor of
the software program being used, and request a driver for the MFP.
NOTE The most recent drivers are available at http://www.hp.com.
Gaining access to Macintosh printer drivers
Use one of the following methods to open the printer drivers from the computer.
Table 3-4 Gaining access to Macintosh printer drivers
82
Operating System
To change the settings for all
print jobs until the software
program is closed
To change the print job
default settings (for example,
turn on Print on Both Sides
by default)
To change the configuration
settings (for example, add a
physical option such as a
tray, or turn on or off a driver
feature such as Allow Manual
Duplexing)
Mac OS v9.1 or later
1.
On the File menu, click
Print.
1.
On the File menu, click
Print.
1.
Click the desktop printer
icon.
2.
Change settings on the
various pop-up menus.
2.
As settings are changed
on the pop-up menu, click
Save Settings.
2.
From the Printing menu,
click Change Setup.
Chapter 3
Installation and configuration
ENWW
Table 3-4 Gaining access to Macintosh printer drivers (continued)
Operating System
To change the settings for all
print jobs until the software
program is closed
To change the print job
default settings (for example,
turn on Print on Both Sides
by default)
To change the configuration
settings (for example, add a
physical option such as a
tray, or turn on or off a driver
feature such as Allow Manual
Duplexing)
Mac OS X v10.2
1.
On the File menu, click
Print.
1.
On the File menu, click
Print.
1.
In the Finder, on the Go
menu, click Applications.
2.
Change settings on the
various pop-up menus.
2.
Change the settings on
the various pop-up
menus, and then, on the
Presets pop-up menu,
click Save as and type a
name for the preset.
2.
Open Utilities, and then
open Print Center.
3.
Click on the print queue.
4.
On the Printers menu,
click Show Info.
5.
Click the Installable
Options menu.
These settings are saved in the
Presets menu. To use the new
settings, select the saved
preset option every time a
program is opened and a job is
printed.
Mac OS X v10.3
1.
On the File menu, click
Print.
1.
On the File menu, click
Print.
2.
Change settings on the
various pop-up menus.
2.
Change settings on the
various pop-up menus,
and then, on the Presets
pop-up menu, click Save
as and type a name for
the preset.
These settings are saved in the
Presets menu. To use the new
settings, select the saved
preset option every time you
open a program and print.
ENWW
NOTE Configuration
settings might not be
available in Classic
mode.
1.
Open Printer Setup
Utility by selecting the
hard drive, clicking
Applications, clicking
Utilities, and then doubleclicking Printer Setup
Utility.
2.
Click on the print queue.
3.
On the Printers menu,
click Show Info.
4.
Click the Installable
Options menu.
Printer drivers for Macintosh computers
83
Software for Macintosh computers
The HP installer provides PostScript® Printer Description (PPD) files, Printer Dialog
Extensions (PDEs), and the HP Printer Utility for use with Macintosh computers.
If both the MFP and the Macintosh computer are connected to a network, use the MFP embedded
Web server (EWS) to configure the MFP. For more information, see Embedded Web server
on page 77.
Installing Macintosh printing system software for networks
This section describes how to install Macintosh printing system software. The printing system
software supports Mac OS v9.1 and later and Mac OS X v10.2 and later.
The printing system software includes the following components:
●
PostScript Printer Description (PPD) files
The PPDs, in combination with the Apple PostScript printer drivers, provide access to MFP
features. An installation program for the PPDs and other software is provided on the compact
disc (CD) that came with the MFP. Use the Apple PostScript printer driver that comes with the
computer.
●
HP Printer Utility
The HP Printer Utility provides access to features that are not available in the printer driver. Use
the illustrated screens to select MFP features and complete the following tasks with the MFP:
●
Name the MFP.
●
Assign the MFP to a zone on the network.
●
Assign an internet protocol (IP) address to the MFP.
●
Download files and fonts.
●
Configure and set the MFP for IP or AppleTalk printing.
Use the HP Printer Utility when the MFP uses a universal serial bus (USB) or is connected to a
TCP/IP-based network.
NOTE The HP Printer Utility is supported for Mac OS X v10.2 or later.
For more information about using the HP Printer Utility, see Software for Macintosh computers
on page 84.
To install printer drivers for Mac OS v9.1 and later
84
1.
Connect the network cable between the HP Jetdirect print server and a network port.
2.
Insert the CD into the CD-ROM drive. The CD menu runs automatically. If the CD menu does
not run automatically, double-click the CD icon on the desktop.
3.
Double-click the Installer icon in the HP LaserJet Installer folder.
4.
Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Chapter 3
Installation and configuration
ENWW
5.
On the computer hard drive, open Applications, open Utilities, and then open Desktop
Printer Utility.
6.
Double-click Printer (AppleTalk).
7.
Next to AppleTalk Printer Selection, click Change.
8.
Select the MFP, click Auto Setup, and then click Create.
NOTE The icon on the desktop looks generic. All of the print panels appear in the print
dialog box with each software program.
To install printer drivers for Mac OS X v10.2 and later
1.
Connect the network cable between the HP Jetdirect print server and a network port.
2.
Insert the CD into the CD-ROM drive.
The CD menu runs automatically. If the CD menu does not run automatically, double-click the
CD icon on the desktop.
3.
Double-click the Installer icon in the HP LaserJet Installer folder.
4.
Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
5.
On the computer hard drive, open Applications, open Utilities, and then open Print Center or
Printer Setup Utility.
NOTE If you are using Mac OS X v10.3, then the Printer Setup Utility has replaced
the Print Center.
6.
Click Add Printer.
7.
Select Rendezvous as the connection type.
8.
Select the MFP from the list.
9.
Click Add Printer.
10. Close the Print Center or the Printer Setup Utility by clicking the close button in the upper-left
corner.
Installing Macintosh printing system software for direct
connections (USB)
NOTE Macintosh computers do not support parallel port connections.
This section explains how to install the printing system software for Mac OS v9.1 and later and
Mac OS X v10.2 and later.
The Apple PostScript driver must be installed in order to use the PPD files. Use the Apple PostScript
driver that came with your Macintosh computer.
ENWW
Software for Macintosh computers
85
To install the printing system software
1.
Connect a USB cable between the USB port on the MFP and the USB port on the computer.
Use a standard 2-meter (6.56-foot) USB cable.
2.
Insert the MFP CD into the CD-ROM drive and run the installer.
The CD menu runs automatically. If the CD menu does not run automatically, double-click the
CD icon on the desktop.
3.
Double-click the Installer icon in the HP LaserJet Installer folder.
4.
Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
5.
For Mac OS v9.1 and later:
a.
On the computer hard drive, open Applications, open Utilities, and then open Print Center.
b.
Double-click Printer (USB), and then click OK.
c.
Next to USB Printer Selection, click Change.
d.
Select the MFP, and then click OK.
e.
Next to Postscript Printer Description (PPD) File, click Auto Setup, and then click Create.
f.
On the Printing menu, click Set Default Printer.
For Mac OS X v10.2 and later: USB queues are created automatically when the MFP is
attached to the computer. However, the queue will use a generic PPD if the installer has not
been run before the USB cable is connected. To change the queue PPD, open the Print Center
or Printer Setup Utility, select the correct printer queue, and then click Show Info to open the
Printer Info dialog box. In the pop-up menu, select Printer Model, and then, in the pop-up
menu in which Generic is selected, select the correct PPD for the MFP.
6.
Print a test page or a page from any software program to make sure that the software is
correctly installed.
If installation fails, reinstall the software. If this fails, see the installation notes or late-breaking
readme files on the MFP CD or the flyer that came with the product, or go to http://www.hp.com/
support/clj4730mfp for help or more information.
NOTE The icon on the Mac OS v9.x desktop looks generic. All of the print panels appear in
the Print dialog box with each software program.
To remove software from Macintosh operating systems
To remove the software from a Macintosh computer, drag the PPD files to the trash can.
86
Chapter 3
Installation and configuration
ENWW
Network configuration
Configure certain network parameters on the MFP as needed. Configure these parameters from
installation software, the MFP product control panel, the embedded Web server, or management
software, such as HP Web Jetadmin or the HP LaserJet Utility for Macintosh.
NOTE For more information about using the embedded Web server, see Embedded Web
server on page 77.
For more information about supported networks and network configuration tools, see the
HP Jetdirect Print Server Administrator’s Guide. The guide comes with MFPs in which an
HP Jetdirect print server is installed.
This section contains the following instructions for configuring network parameters from the MFP
product control panel:
●
Configuring TCP/IP parameters.
●
Disabling unused network protocols.
Configuring TCP/IP parameters
Use the MFP product control panel to configure these TCP/IP parameters:
●
IP address (4 bytes)
●
Subnet mask (4 bytes)
●
Default gateway (4 bytes)
To manually configure TCP/IP parameters from the MFP control panel
Use manual configuration to set an IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.
Setting an IP address
1.
Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2.
Scroll to and touch Configure Device.
3.
Scroll to and touch I/O.
4.
Scroll to and touch JETDIRECT MENU.
5.
Scroll to and touch TCP/IP.
6.
Scroll to and touch CONFIG METHOD.
7.
Scroll to and touch MANUAL or MANUAL SETTINGS.
8.
Scroll to and touch IP Address: X.
9.
Use the right and left arrows to select each byte of the IP address, and then use the numeric
keypad to enter the value of each byte.
10. Touch OK.
ENWW
Network configuration
87
Setting the subnet mask
1.
Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2.
Scroll to and touch Configure Device.
3.
Scroll to and touch I/O.
4.
Scroll to and touch JETDIRECT MENU.
5.
Scroll to and touch TCP/IP.
6.
Scroll to and touch CONFIG METHOD.
7.
Scroll to and touch MANUAL.
Scroll to and touch MANUAL SETTINGS.
8.
Scroll to and touch SUBNET MASK
NOTE The first three sets of numbers are highlighted.
9.
Use the right and left arrows to select each byte of the subnet mask, and then use the numeric
keypad to enter the value of each byte.
10. Touch OK.
Setting the default gateway
1.
Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2.
Scroll to and touch Configure Device.
3.
Scroll to and touch I/O.
4.
Scroll to and touch JETDIRECT MENU.
5.
Scroll to and touch TCP/IP.
6.
Scroll to and touch CONFIG METHOD.
7.
Scroll to and touch MANUAL or MANUAL SETTINGS.
8.
Scroll to and touch DEFAULT GATEWAY.
NOTE The first set of 3 numbers shows the default settings. If there is not a number
highlighted, a highlighted empty underscore appears.
9.
Use the right and left arrows to select each byte of the default gateway, and then use the
numeric keypad to enter the value of each byte.
10. Touch OK.
88
Chapter 3
Installation and configuration
ENWW
Disabling network protocols (optional)
By factory default, all supported network protocols are enabled. Disabling unused protocols has the
following benefits:
●
Decreases MFP-generated network traffic.
●
Prevents unauthorized users from printing to the MFP.
●
Provides only pertinent information on the configuration page.
●
Allows the MFP control panel to display protocol-specific error and warning messages.
NOTE TCP/IP configuration cannot be disabled on the HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp.
Disabling IPX/SPX
NOTE Do not disable this protocol if Windows 95/98, Windows NT, Me, 2000, and XP users
will be printing to the MFP using direct-mode IPX/SPX.
1.
Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2.
Scroll to and touch Configure Device.
3.
Scroll to and touch I/O.
4.
Scroll to and touch JETDIRECT.
5.
Scroll to and touch IPX/SPX.
6.
Scroll to and touch ENABLE.
7.
Scroll to and touch ON or OFF.
8.
Touch OK.
Disabling DLC/LLC
ENWW
1.
Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2.
Scroll to and touch Configure Device.
3.
Scroll to and touch I/O.
4.
Scroll to and touch JETDIRECT.
5.
Scroll to and touch DLC/LLC.
6.
Scroll to and touch ENABLE.
7.
Scroll to and touch ON or OFF.
8.
Press OK.
Network configuration
89
Disabling AppleTalk
90
1.
Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2.
Scroll to and touch Configure Device.
3.
Scroll to and touch I/O.
4.
Scroll to and touch JETDIRECT.
5.
Scroll to and touch APPLETALK.
6.
Scroll to and touch ENABLE.
7.
Scroll to and touch ON or OFF.
8.
Press OK.
Chapter 3
Installation and configuration
ENWW
Security features
Several important security features are available for the MFP. Use the information in this section to
configure these features to meet the user's needs.
Securing the embedded Web server
Assign a password for access to the embedded Web server so that unauthorized users cannot
change the MFP settings.
To secure the embedded Web server
1.
Open the embedded Web server by entering the IP address.
2.
Click the Settings tab.
3.
On the left side of the window, click Security.
4.
Type the password next to New Password, and type it again next to Verify Password.
5.
Click Apply. Make note of the password, and store it in a safe place.
Foreign Interface Harness (FIH)
The Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) provides a portal on the MFP. By using the FIH and third-party
equipment, information about copies that are made on the MFP can be tracked.
Requirements
●
Windows 9X, Windows Me, Windows 2000, or Windows XP
●
Access to third-party accounting hardware solutions, such as Equitrac or Copitrak devices
Using the FIH
To use the FIH, download and install the FIH software. The software is available from
http://www.hp.com/support/clj4730mfp. The software is used to enable or disable the FIH portal. Use
the software to set and change the administrator personal identification number (PIN).
Administrators can use the PIN option to configure the FIH to prevent any unauthorized changes.
Changes can be made only with the correct PIN authentication.
NOTE It is important to remember the PIN that is assigned to the FIH administration
software. The PIN is required to make any changes to the FIH.
To enable the FIH portal
ENWW
1.
Double-click the FIH.EXE file. The Foreign Interface Harness dialog box appears.
2.
Click OK.
3.
Click Enable.
4.
If a PIN has not been previously entered, click No. If a PIN was entered previously, click Yes. If
clicking No, type and confirm the PIN, and then click OK. If clicking Yes, type the PIN and click
OK.
Security features
91
NOTE The PIN must be numeric.
5.
Click the appropriate button for the type of connection: Direct or Network. If selecting Direct,
type the MFP port. If selecting Network, type the IP address and port for the MFP.
NOTE The IP address for the MFP can be found on the configuration page. Print a
configuration page from the product control panel by touching Menu, touching
Information, and then touching PRINT CONFIGURATION.
If an incorrect IP address is typed, an error message will display. Otherwise, the portal is enabled.
To disable the FIH portal
1.
Double-click the FIH.EXE file. The Foreign Interface Harness dialog box appears.
2.
Click OK.
3.
Click Disable.
4.
Type the PIN and click OK.
5.
Click the appropriate button for the type of connection: Direct or Network. If Direct is selected,
type the MFP port and click OK. If Network is selected, type the IP address and port for the
MFP, and then click OK. The portal is disabled.
NOTE If the PIN number is lost and the portal needs to be disabled, try using the default PIN
that is listed to disable it. For assistance, use the HP Instant Support service, which is
available through the embedded Web server or at http://instantsupport.hp.com.
Secure Disk Erase
To protect deleted data from unauthorized access on the MFP hard drive, use Secure Disk Erase.
Secure Disk Erase is a security feature that securely erases print and copy jobs from the hard drive.
Secure Disk Erase offers the following levels of disk security:
●
Non-Secure Fast Erase. This is a simple file-table erase function. Access to the file is
removed, but actual data is retained on the disk until it is overwritten by subsequent datastorage operations. This is the fastest mode. Non-Secure Fast Erase is the default erase mode.
●
Secure Fast Erase. Access to the file is removed, and the data is overwritten with a fixed
identical character pattern. This is slower than Non-Secure Fast Erase, but all data is
overwritten. Secure Fast Erase meets the U.S. Department of Defense 5220-22.M requirements
for the clearing of disk media.
●
Secure Sanitizing Erase. This level is similar to the Secure Fast Erase mode. In addition, data
is repetitively overwritten by using an algorithm that prevents any residual data persistence. This
mode will impact performance. Secure Sanitizing Erase meets the U.S. Department of Defense
5220-22.M requirements for the sanitization of disk media.
Data affected
Data affected (covered) by the Secure Disk Erase feature includes stored jobs, proof and hold jobs,
disk-based fonts, disk-based macros (forms), and temporary files that are created during the print
and copying process.
92
Chapter 3
Installation and configuration
ENWW
NOTE Stored jobs will be securely overwritten only when they have been deleted through
the RETRIEVE JOB menu on the MFP after the appropriate erase mode has been set.
This feature will not impact data that is stored on flash-based product non-volatile RAM (NVRAM)
that is used to store default settings, page counts, and similar data. This feature does not affect data
that is stored on a system RAM disk (if one is used). This feature does not impact data that is stored
on the flash-based system boot RAM.
Changing the Secure Disk Erase mode does not overwrite previous data on the disk, nor does it
immediately perform a full-disk sanitization. Changing the Secure Disk Erase mode changes how the
MFP cleans up temporary data for jobs after the erase mode has been changed.
Gaining access to Secure Disk Erase
Use HP Web Jetadmin to gain access to and set the Secure Disk Erase feature.
Additional Information
For additional information about the HP Secure Disk Erase feature, see the HP support flyer or go to
http://www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin/.
Job storage features
Several job storage features are available for this MFP. These features include printing private jobs,
storing print jobs, quick-copying jobs, and proofing and holding jobs.
For more information about job storage features, see Job storage features on page 93.
DSS authentication
Optional Digital Sending Software (DSS) for the MFP is available for purchase separately. The
software provides an advanced sending program that contains an authentication process. This
process requires users to type a user identification and a password before they can use any of the
DSS features that require authentication.
See Parts and supplies on page 43 for ordering information.
Locking the control panel menus
To prevent someone from changing MFP configuration, the control panel menus can be locked. This
prevents unauthorized users from changing the configuration settings such as the SMTP server. The
following procedure describes how to restrict access to the control panel menus by using the
HP Web Jetadmin software. (See Using HP Web Jetadmin software on page 639.)
To lock the control panel menus
ENWW
1.
Open the HP Web Jetadmin program.
2.
Open the DEVICE MANAGEMENT folder in the drop-down list in the Navigation panel.
Navigate to the DEVICE LISTS folder.
3.
Select the MFP.
4.
In the Device Tools drop-down list, select Configure.
Security features
93
5.
Select Security from the Configuration Categories list.
6.
Type a Device Password.
7.
In the Control Panel Access section, select Maximum Lock. This prevents unauthorized users
from gaining access to configuration settings.
Locking the formatter cage
A Kensington lock can be placed on the formatter cage to prevent unauthorized access to
components on the formatter. If interested in purchasing a Kensington locking accessory for the
formatter cage on an HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp, please contact HP at http://www.hp.com/support/
clj4730mfp.
NOTE A Kensington lock is typically used for locking laptop computers in order to prevent
theft.
The following figure indicates where the lock should be placed.
94
Chapter 3
Installation and configuration
ENWW
Optional output and input devices
Optional paper-handling devices are available for the MFP.
●
3-bin mailbox with output accessory bridge
●
Stapler/stacker with output accessory bridge
Each of these accessories comes with an installation guide that explains how to install it. After
installing an accessory, print a configuration page to verify that the accessory was installed
successfully. If the accessory is installed correctly, it is listed on the configuration page in the section
for Paper trays and options.
ENWW
Optional output and input devices
95
96
Chapter 3
Installation and configuration
ENWW
4
Maintenance
This chapter contains information about the following topics:
ENWW
●
Using the cleaning page
●
Cleaning the MFP
●
Calibrating the scanner
●
Performing preventive maintenance
●
Managing print cartridges
●
Approximate replacement intervals for supplies
●
ETB life under different circumstances
●
Changing print cartridges
●
Replacing supplies
●
MFP memory and fonts
●
Installing memory and fonts
●
Setting the real-time clock
●
Configuring and verifying an IP address
●
Upgrading the firmware
97
Using the cleaning page
During printing, toner and dust particles can accumulate inside the MFP. Over time, this buildup can
cause print quality problems, such as toner specks or smearing. This MFP has a cleaning mode that
can correct and prevent these problems.
Processing a cleaning page
1.
Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2.
Scroll to and touch Configure Device.
3.
Scroll to and touch PRINT QUALITY.
4.
Scroll to and touch PROCESS CLEANING PAGE.
NOTE The MFP prints a cleaning page with a pattern and provides further instructions.
98
Chapter 4
Maintenance
ENWW
Cleaning the MFP
To maintain print quality, clean the MFP thoroughly whenever print-quality problems occur and every
time you replace the print cartridge.
WARNING! Avoid touching the fusing area when cleaning the MFP. It can be hot.
CAUTION To avoid permanent damage to the print cartridge, do not use ammonia-based
cleaners on or around the MFP except as directed.
Cleaning the outside of the MFP
●
Clean the outside of the MFP if it is visibly marked.
●
Use a soft, lint-free cloth dampened with water, or with water and a mild detergent.
Cleaning the touchscreen
Clean the touchscreen whenever it is necessary to remove fingerprints or dust. Wipe the
touchscreen gently with a clean, water-dampened, lint-free cloth.
CAUTION Use water only. Solvents or cleaners can damage the touchscreen. Do not pour
or spray water directly onto the touchscreen.
Cleaning the scanner glass
●
Clean the scanner glass only if dirt is visible, or if experiencing a decrease in copy quality, such
as streaking.
●
Clean the scanner glass by wiping it gently with a clean, slightly damp, lint-free cloth. Use an
ammonia-based surface cleaner only when a water-dampened cloth does not clean the scanner
glass. Spray or pour the cleaner onto the cleaning cloth. Do not spray or pour the cleaner onto
the scanner glass.
CAUTION Do not pour or spray liquids directly onto the scanner glass. Do not press hard on
the glass surface. (The glass could break.)
Cleaning the ADF delivery system
Clean the ADF only if it is visibly marked or dirty, or if you are experiencing a decrease in copy
quality (such as streaking).
ENWW
Cleaning the MFP
99
To clean the ADF delivery system
100
1.
Open the scanner lid.
2.
Locate the white vinyl ADF backing.
3.
Clean the ADF backing with a clean, damp, lint-free cloth. Use an ammonia-based surface
cleaner only when a water-dampened cloth does not clean the ADF components.
4.
Clean the scanner glass by wiping it gently with a clean, slightly damp, lint-free cloth. Use an
ammonia-based surface cleaner only when a water-dampened cloth does not clean the scanner
glass.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
ENWW
5.
Close the scanner lid.
To clean the ADF rollers
You should clean the rollers in the ADF if you are experiencing misfeeds or if your originals show
marks as they exit the ADF.
CAUTION Clean the rollers only if experiencing misfeeds or marks on the originals, and dust
is on the rollers. Cleaning the rollers frequently could introduce dust into the device.
1.
ENWW
Open the scanner lid.
Cleaning the MFP
101
2.
Locate the rollers adjacent to the white vinyl ADF backing.
3.
Wipe the rollers gently with a clean, water-dampened, lint-free cloth.
CAUTION
4.
102
Do not pour water directly onto the rollers. Doing so might damage the device.
Close the scanner lid.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
ENWW
5.
Pull the release lever to open the ADF cover.
6.
Locate the rollers.
7.
Wipe the rollers with a clean, water-dampened, lint-free cloth.
CAUTION
ENWW
Do not pour water directly onto the rollers. Doing so might damage the device.
Cleaning the MFP
103
8.
Locate the separation pad.
9.
Wipe the pad with a clean, water-dampened, lint-free cloth.
10. Close the ADF cover.
Cleaning the mylar strip
Clean the mylar strips on the underside of the scanner lid only if you are experiencing a decrease in
copy quality (such as vertical lines) during copying using the ADF.
To clean the mylar strip
1.
104
Open the scanner lid.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
ENWW
2.
Locate the mylar strip.
3.
Clean the mylar strip with a clean, damp, lint-free cloth.
4.
Close the scanner lid.
NOTE Replacement mylar strips are stored in an envelope that is underneath the white vinyl
ADF backing. Follow the instructions that are in the envelope.
ENWW
Cleaning the MFP
105
Calibrating the scanner
Calibrate the scanner to compensate for offsets in the scanner imaging system (carriage head) for
ADF and flatbed scans. Because of mechanical tolerances, the scanner's carriage head might not
read the position of the image accurately. During the calibration procedure, scanner offset values are
calculated and stored. The offset values are then used when producing scans so that the correct
portion of the document is captured.
Scanner calibration should be carried out only if experiencing offset problems with the scanned
images. The scanner is calibrated before it leaves the factory. It needs to be calibrated again only
rarely.
Before calibrating the scanner, print the calibration target.
To print the calibration target
1.
Place letter or A4-size paper in tray 1, and adjust the side guides.
2.
Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
3.
Scroll to and touch DIAGNOSTICS.
4.
Scroll to and touch CALIBRATE SCANNER.
5.
Touch OK to print the first pass of the calibration target.
6.
Place the first pass of the calibration target face-down in tray 1 so that the arrows are facing into
the MFP.
7.
Touch OK to print the second pass. The final calibration target must look like the following figure.
CAUTION If the calibration target does not look like the figure shown here, the
calibration process will fail and the quality of scans will be degraded. The black areas
must extend completely to the short edges of the page. If they do not, use a black marker
to extend the black areas to the edge of the page. Press Stop to cancel the calibration.
8.
Place the calibration target face-up into the ADF, and adjust the side guides. Touch OK to
continue.
9.
After the calibration target has passed through the ADF once, place it in the ADF face down.
Touch OK to continue.
10. Place the calibration target face-down on the scanner glass and touch OK. After this pass, the
calibration is complete.
The product control panel displays the message Scanner calibration successful to indicate
success or the message Scanner calibration failed to indicate that the calibration failed.
106
Chapter 4
Maintenance
ENWW
Performing preventive maintenance
The MFP requires periodic maintenance to maintain optimum performance. A product control panel
message alerts you when it is time to purchase the preventive maintenance kit.
ADF maintenance kit
After feeding 90,000 pages through the ADF, a Replace Document Feeder Kit message appears
on the product control panel display. This message appears approximately one month before the kit
needs to be replaced. Order a new kit when this message appears.
The ADF maintenance kit includes the following items:
●
One pickup roller assembly
●
One separation pad
●
One mylar sheet kit
●
An instruction sheet
Follow the instructions that come with the kit to install it.
After replacing the kit, reset the ADF maintenance kit count.
To reset the ADF maintenance kit count
ENWW
1.
Turn the MFP off and then on.
2.
When XXXMB appears on the product control panel display, press and hold 6 until all three
LEDs flash once and then stay on. (This might take up to 20 seconds.)
3.
Release 6 and then press 3 twice.
4.
Press 6 to select NEW DOCUMENT FEEDER KIT.
5.
The MFP completes its initialization sequence. The ADF maintenance kit counter is
automatically reset.
Performing preventive maintenance
107
Managing print cartridges
This section provides information about HP print cartridges, their life expectancies, how to store
them, and how to identify genuine HP supplies. Information also appears about non-HP print
cartridges.
HP print cartridges
When a genuine HP print cartridge is used, several types of information are available, such as the
following:
●
Amount of toner remaining
●
Estimated number of pages remaining
●
Number of pages printed
Changing print cartridges
When a print cartridge approaches the end of its useful life, the product control panel displays a
message recommending that a replacement be ordered. The MFP can continue to print using the
current print cartridge until the product control panel displays a message instructing the user to
replace the cartridge.
The MFP uses four colors and has a different print cartridge for each color: black (K), magenta (M),
cyan (C), and yellow (Y).
Replace a print cartridge when the MFP product control panel displays a REPLACE <COLOR>
CARTRIDGE message. The product control panel display will also indicate the color that should be
replaced (if a genuine HP cartridge is currently installed).
Replacing a print cartridge
CAUTION If toner gets on clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash the clothes in cold
water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.
NOTE For information about recycling used print cartridges, visit the HP LaserJet Supplies
Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/recycle.
108
Chapter 4
Maintenance
ENWW
To replace the print cartridge
ENWW
1.
Using the handles, open the covers on the right side of the MFP.
2.
Grasp the green handle on the transfer unit and pull down to open it.
Managing print cartridges
109
110
3.
Remove the used print cartridge from the MFP.
4.
Remove the new print cartridge from the bag. Place the used print cartridge in the bag for
recycling.
5.
Align the print cartridge with the tracks inside the MPF and insert the print cartridge until it is
completely seated.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
ENWW
6.
Close the transfer unit.
7.
Close the covers on the right side of the MFP. After a short while, the product control panel
should display Ready.
Non-HP print cartridges
Hewlett-Packard Company cannot recommend use of non-HP print cartridges, either new or
remanufactured. Because they are not HP products, HP cannot influence their design or control their
quality. Service or repair that is required as a result of using a non-HP print cartridge will not be
covered under the MFP warranty.
When a non-HP print cartridge is used, certain features, such as remaining toner volume data may
not be available.
Using genuine HP supplies ensures the availability of all HP printing features.
Print cartridge authentication
The MFP will let users know if a print cartridge is not a genuine HP print cartridge when the cartridge
is inserted into the MFP. If you believe that you purchased a genuine HP supply, go to
http://www.hp.com/go/anticounterfeit.
ENWW
Managing print cartridges
111
Print cartridge storage
Do not remove the print cartridge from its package until you are ready to use it.
Always store the print cartridge in the proper environment. The storage temperature should be
between -20°C and 40°C (-4°F to 104°F). The relative humidity should be between 10% and 90%.
CAUTION To prevent damage to the print cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a
few minutes.
Print cartridge life expectancy
The life of the print cartridge depends on the amount of toner that print jobs require and the length of
life for the components inside the cartridge. When printing text at approximately 5% coverage (typical
for a business letter), the HP print cartridge lasts an average of 12,000 pages. The page-yield
specification that HP provides is a general guideline. Actual yield can vary according to usage
conditions.
At any time, you can verify life expectancy by checking the supply level, as described below.
Checking the supply level
Check the supply (toner) level by using the product control panel, embedded Web server, or
HP Web Jetadmin, or by printing a supplies status page.
Using the product control panel
1.
Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2.
Scroll to and touch Information.
3.
Scroll to and touch SUPPLIES STATUS.
Using the embedded Web server
1.
In a browser, enter the IP address for the MFP home page. This goes to the MFP status page.
2.
On the left side of the screen, click Supplies Status. This goes to the supplies status page,
which provides print cartridge information.
Using HP Web Jetadmin
In HP Web Jetadmin, select the MFP. The device status page shows print cartridge information.
Printing a supplies status page
Use the supplies status page to obtain information about the print cartridge that is installed in the
MFP, the amount of toner that remains in the print cartridge, and the number of pages and jobs that
have been processed. The page also lets users know when they should schedule the next preventive
maintenance for each maintenance kit.
112
1.
Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2.
Scroll to and touch Information.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
ENWW
ENWW
3.
Scroll to and touch PRINT SUPPLIES STATUS PAGE.
4.
Touch OK.
Managing print cartridges
113
Approximate replacement intervals for supplies
The following table lists the estimated replacement intervals for supplies and the control panel
messages that prompt when to replace each item. Usage conditions and print patterns can cause
results to vary.
1
2
3
Item
Control panel message
Page count
Approximate time period2
Black cartridges
REPLACE BLACK
CARTRIDGE
12,000 pages1
3 months
Color cartridges
REPLACE <COLOR>
CARTRIDGE
12,000 pages1
3 months
Transfer kit
REPLACE TRANSFER KIT
120,000 pages 3
40 months
Fuser kit
REPLACE FUSER KIT
150,000 pages3
50 months
Approximate average A4-/letter-size page count based on 5% coverage of individual colors.
Approximate transfer unit life is based on 4,000 pages per month.
Approximate fuser unit life is based on 4,000 pages per month.
Use the embedded Web server to order supplies. For more information, see Using the
embedded Web server on page 112.
114
Chapter 4
Maintenance
ENWW
ETB life under different circumstances
Depending on the MFP workload, the customer will need to replace the ETB once or twice in the life
of the MFP. In order to help plan supplies purchases, the HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp MFP
calculates an estimated remaining number of pages that can be printed with the ETB.
The number of pages the ETB can print is a function of two factors:
●
The number of times the belt goes from a stationary to a rotating state (spins up)
●
The number of pages that have been printed on the belt
Unless print jobs are queued back to back, each print job requires the belt to spin up.
Think of the ETB as having a limited number of wear units. It has 200,000 wear units when it is new.
Each time the belt spins up, it uses two wear units. Each time it prints a page, the belt uses one wear
unit.
Because most print jobs are not queued, the average number of pages per job, or job length, is a
factor in how fast the ETB will wear out. The shorter the average job, the more quickly the ETB will
wear out.
Figure 4-1 ETB total page count according to average job length on page 115 shows how many pages
an ETB can print, given various average job lengths.
Figure 4-1 ETB total page count according to average job length
The MFP assumes an average print job length of three pages to estimate how many pages are
remaining on the ETB. With an average job length of three pages, the ETB will print 120,000 pages.
If all print jobs are exactly three pages long, for each page printed the number of estimated pages
remaining would decrease by one, beginning with the maximum 120,000 pages. If the job length is
less than three pages, the estimated-pages-remaining number decreases more quickly than the rate
at which the number of pages actually printed increases. If the job length is greater than three pages,
the number of pages remaining decreases less quickly than the rate at which the actual number of
pages printed increases.
ENWW
ETB life under different circumstances
115
Changing print cartridges
When a print cartridge approaches the end of its useful life, the product control panel displays a
message recommending that a replacement be ordered. The MFP can continue to print using the
current print cartridge until the product control panel displays a message instructing users to replace
the cartridge.
The MFP uses four colors and has a different print cartridge for each color: black (K), magenta (M),
cyan (C), and yellow (Y).
Replace a print cartridge when the MFP control panel displays a REPLACE <COLOR> CARTRIDGE
message. The product control panel display will also indicate the color that should be replaced (if a
genuine HP cartridge is currently installed).
Replacing print cartridges
For instructions on replacing print cartridges, see Replacing a print cartridge on page 108.
CAUTION If toner gets on clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash the clothes in cold
water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.
NOTE For information about recycling used print cartridges, visit the HP LaserJet Supplies
Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/recycle.
116
Chapter 4
Maintenance
ENWW
Replacing supplies
When using genuine HP supplies, the MFP automatically notifies you when supplies are nearly
depleted. The notification to order supplies allows ample time to order new supplies before they need
to be replaced.
Locating supplies
Supplies are identified by their labeling and their blue plastic handles.
The following figure illustrates the location of each supply item.
Figure 4-2 Supply item locations
1
Fuser
2
Print cartridges
3
ETB (image transfer unit)
4
Stapler cartridge
Supply replacement guidelines
To facilitate the replacement of supplies, keep the following guidelines in mind when setting up the
MFP.
●
Allow sufficient space above and in the front of the MFP for removing supplies.
●
The MFP should be located on a flat, sturdy surface.
For instructions on installing supplies, see the installation guides provided with each supply item or
see more information at http://www.hp.com/support/clj4730mfp. When you connect, select Solve a
Problem.
CAUTION HP recommends the use of genuine HP products in this MFP. Use of nonHP products may cause problems requiring service that is not covered by the HP extended
warranty or service agreements.
ENWW
Replacing supplies
117
Making room around the MFP for replacing supplies
The following illustration shows the clearance necessary in front of, above, and to the side of the
MFP for replacing supplies.
Figure 4-3 Supplies replacement clearance diagram
1
1160 mm (45.7 inches); if stapler/stacker or 3-bin mailbox is installed: 1460 mm (47.5 inches)
2
980 mm (38.6 inches)
3
1050 mm (41.4 inches)
Replacing the ETB
Replace the ETB when a REPLACE TRANSFER KIT message appears on the product control panel
display.
118
1.
Turn the MFP off.
2.
Open the right upper and lower covers.
3.
Lower the ETB by pulling the green handle at the top of the unit downward.
4.
Press the small blue latches located on either side of the bottom of the ETB and lift the unit out
of the MFP.
5.
Install the new ETB.
6.
Close the right upper and lower covers.
7.
Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server. See Using the
embedded Web server on page 112 for more information.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
ENWW
Replacing the fuser
Replace the fuser when a REPLACE FUSER KIT message appears on the product control panel
display.
1.
Turn the MFP off.
2.
Open the right upper cover.
3.
Grasp the purple handles on the fuser.
4.
Remove the old fuser from the MFP.
5.
Install the new fuser.
6.
Close the right upper cover.
7.
Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server. See Parts and
supplies on page 43 for more information.
Replacing the stapler cartridge
The stapler cartridge contains 5,000 staples.
Replace the stapler cartridge if the MFP control panel display prompts users with a STAPLER LOW
ON STAPLES message (at this point, the stapler cartridge has 20 to 50 staples left) or a STAPLER
OUT OF STAPLES message. If the stapler runs out of staples and the stapler/stacker is configured
to CONTINUE, jobs continue to print to the stapler/stacker, but they are not stapled. If the stapler/
stacker is configured to stop, printing stops until a new stapler cartridge is loaded.
NOTE HP recommends replacing the stapler cartridge as soon as the STAPLER OUT OF
STAPLES message is displayed. Although some usable staples remain in the cartridge, they
could fall into the stapler mechanism and cause product failure.
Loading a new stapler cartridge
1.
Press and hold the release button on the top of the stapler/stacker. Pull the stapler/stacker
away from the MFP.
NOTE For information on ordering a new stapler cartridge (part number C8091A), see
Parts and supplies on page 43.
ENWW
Replacing supplies
119
2.
Open the staple cartridge cover.
3.
Grasp the green staple cartridge handle and pull the old staple cartridge out of the stapler unit.
4.
Insert the new staple cartridge into the stapler unit and push down on the green handle until the
unit snaps into place.
NOTE To obtain a new stapler cartridge, order part number C8091A.
5.
120
Close the staple cartridge cover, and slide the stapler/stacker into the MFP.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
ENWW
MFP memory and fonts
The MFP has 256 MB of synchronous dynamic random-access memory (RAM) expandable to
512 MB by using industry-standard 100-pin double data rate dual inline memory modules (DDR
DIMMS).
NOTE Memory specification: HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp uses 100-pin small outline dual
inline memory modules (SODIMM) that support 128 or 256 MB of RAM.
The MFP also has three flash memory card slots for MFP firmware, fonts, and other solutions.
●
The first flash memory card is reserved for MFP firmware.
NOTE Use the first flash memory card slot for firmware only. The slot is marked
"Firmware Slot".
●
The two additional flash memory card slots enable the user to add fonts and third-party
solutions, such as signatures and personalities. The slots are marked "Slot 2" and "Slot 3”. For
more information about types of solutions available, go to http://www.hp.com/go/gsc.
NOTE Flash memory cards adhere to Compact Flash specifications and size.
CAUTION Do not insert a flash memory card that is designed for use with a digital camera
into the MFP. The MFP does not support photo printing directly from a flash memory card. If a
camera-type flash memory card is installed, the product control panel displays a message
asking if the flash memory card should be reformatted. If the card is reformatted, all data on
the card will be lost.
Add more memory to the MFP to support printing of complex graphics or PostScript documents, or
use of many downloaded fonts. Additional memory also allows the MFP to print multiple collated
copies at maximum speed.
NOTE Single inline memory modules (SIMMs) / dual in-line memory modules (DIMMs) used
on previous HP LaserJet MFPs are not compatible with this MFP.
NOTE To order SODIMMs, see Parts and supplies on page 43.
Before ordering additional memory, see how much memory is currently installed by printing a
configuration page.
Printing a configuration page
ENWW
1.
Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2.
Scroll to and touch Information.
3.
Scroll to and touch PRINT CONFIGURATION.
4.
Touch OK to print the configuration page.
MFP memory and fonts
121
Installing memory and fonts
Additional memory can be installed in the MFP. A font card that will allow the MFP to print characters
for languages such as Chinese or the Cyrillic alphabet can also be installed.
CAUTION Static electricity can damage DIMMs. When handling DIMMs, either wear an
antistatic wrist strap, or frequently touch the surface of the DIMM antistatic package and then
touch bare metal on the MFP.
Installing DDR memory DIMMs
122
1.
Turn the MFP off.
2.
Disconnect all power and interface cables.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
ENWW
ENWW
3.
Locate the formatter board in the rear of the MFP.
4.
Locate the gray formatter pressure release tabs on the formatter board in the rear of the MFP.
5.
Gently squeeze the tabs and pull them out of the formatter.
Installing memory and fonts
123
124
6.
Gently pull on the black tabs at the top and bottom of the formatter board and pull the formatter
board from the MFP. Place the formatter board on a clean, flat, grounded surface.
7.
To replace a DDR DIMM that is currently installed, spread the latches apart on each side of the
DIMM holder on the rear of the formatter.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
ENWW
8.
Lift the DDR DIMM up at an angle, and pull it out.
9.
Remove the new DIMM from the antistatic package. Locate the alignment notch on the bottom
edge of the DIMM.
10. Holding the DIMM by the edges, insert it into the DIMM holder on the rear of the formatter.
When installed correctly, the metal contacts are not visible.
ENWW
Installing memory and fonts
125
11. Push the DIMM holder flat against the back of the formatter.
NOTE If there is difficulty when inserting the DIMM, make sure the notch on the bottom
of the DIMM is aligned with the bar in the slot. If the DIMM still does not go in, confirm
that the correct type of DIMM is being installed.
12. Align the formatter board in the tracks at the top and bottom of the slot, and then slide the board
back into the MFP.
126
Chapter 4
Maintenance
ENWW
13. Reinsert the formatter pressure release tabs into the formatter.
14. Reconnect the power cable and interface cables, and turn the MFP on.
15. If a new memory DIMM was installed, go to Enabling memory on page 132.
ENWW
Installing memory and fonts
127
Installing a flash memory card
CAUTION Do not insert a flash memory card that is designed for use with a digital camera
into the MFP. The MFP does not support photo printing directly from a flash memory card. If a
camera-type flash memory card is installed, the product control panel displays a message
asking if the flash memory card should be reformatted. If the card is reformatted, all data on
the card will be lost.
128
1.
Turn the MFP off.
2.
Disconnect all power and interface cables.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
ENWW
ENWW
3.
Locate the formatter board in the rear of the MFP.
4.
Locate the gray formatter pressure release tabs on the formatter board in the rear of the MFP.
5.
Gently squeeze the tabs and pull them out of the formatter.
Installing memory and fonts
129
6.
Gently pull on the black tabs at the top and bottom of the formatter board and pull the formatter
board from the MFP. Place the formatter board on a clean, flat, grounded surface.
7.
Align the groove on the side of the flash memory card with the notches in the connector and
push it in the slot until it is fully seated.
CAUTION Do not insert the flash memory card at an angle.
NOTE The first flash memory slot marked "Firmware Slot" is reserved for firmware only.
Slots 2 and 3 should be used for all other solutions.
130
Chapter 4
Maintenance
ENWW
ENWW
8.
Align the formatter board in the tracks at the top and bottom of the slot, and then slide the board
back into the MFP.
9.
Reinsert the formatter pressure release tabs into the formatter.
Installing memory and fonts
131
10. Reconnect the power cable and interface cables, and turn the MFP on.
Enabling memory
After a new memory DIMM is installed, set the printer driver to recognize the newly added memory.
To enable memory for Windows 98 and Windows Me
1.
On the Start menu, point to Settings, and click Printers.
2.
Right-click the MFP and select Properties.
3.
On the Configure tab, click More.
4.
In the Total Memory field, type or select the total amount of memory that is now installed.
5.
Click OK.
To enable memory for Windows 2000 and Windows XP
132
1.
On the Start menu, point to Settings, and click Printers or Printers and Faxes.
2.
Right-click the MFP and select Properties.
3.
On the Device Settings tab, click Printer Memory (in the Installable Options section).
4.
Select the total amount of memory that is now installed.
5.
Click OK.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
ENWW
Setting the real-time clock
Use the real-time clock feature to set the date and time settings. The date and time information is
attached to stored print, fax, and digital-send jobs, so that the most recent versions of stored print
jobs can be identified. The MFP can also be set to automatically warm up and prepare for use at a
specified time each day.
Setting the date and time
When setting the date and time you can set the date format, date, time format, and time.
To set the date format
1.
Press Menu.
2.
Scroll to and touch Configure Device.
3.
Scroll to and touch SYSTEM SETUP.
4.
Scroll to and touch DATE/TIME.
5.
Scroll to and touch DATE FORMAT.
6.
Scroll to and touch the appropriate format. The settings are saved and the product control panel
returns to the DATE/TIME submenu.
7.
Scroll to and touch Exit to exit the menu.
To set the date
1.
Press Menu.
2.
Scroll to and touch Configure Device.
3.
Scroll to and touch SYSTEM SETUP.
4.
Scroll to and touch DATE/TIME.
5.
Scroll to and touch DATE.
6.
Scroll to and touch the appropriate options to set the correct month, day of the month, and the
year.
NOTE The order of modifying the month, date of the month, and year depends upon
the date-format setting.
7.
The settings are saved and the product control panel returns to the DATE/TIME submenu.
8.
Touch Exit to exit the menu.
To set the time format
ENWW
1.
Press Menu.
2.
Scroll to and touch Configure Device.
3.
Scroll to and touch SYSTEM SETUP.
Setting the real-time clock
133
4.
Scroll to and touch DATE/TIME.
5.
Scroll to and touch TIME FORMAT.
6.
Touch the appropriate format. The settings are saved and the product control panel returns to
the DATE/TIME submenu.
7.
Scroll to and touch Exit to exit the menu.
To set the time
1.
Press Menu.
2.
Scroll to and touch Configure Device.
3.
Scroll to and touch SYSTEM SETUP.
4.
Scroll to and touch DATE/TIME.
5.
Scroll to and touch TIME.
6.
Touch the appropriate options to set the correct hour, minute, and AM/PM setting.
NOTE The order of modifying the hour, minute, and AM/PM setting depends upon the
time-format setting.
7.
The settings are saved and the product control panel returns to the DATE/TIME submenu.
8.
Touch Exit to exit the menu.
Setting the wake time
Use the wake time feature to wake the MFP at a set time each day. If a wake time is set, use an
extended Sleep-delay period. See Setting the Sleep delay on page 135.
To set the wake time
1.
Press Menu.
2.
Scroll to and touch Configure Device.
3.
Scroll to and touch SYSTEM SETUP.
4.
Scroll to and touch WAKE TIME.
5.
Touch the day of the week for which the wake time is being set.
6.
Scroll to and touch CUSTOM.
7.
Touch the appropriate options to set the correct hour, minute, and AM/PM setting.
8.
To wake the MFP at the same time each day, on the APPLY TO ALL DAYS screen, touch YES.
-orTo set the time for individual days, touch NO, and repeat steps 5 through 7 for each day.
134
Chapter 4
Maintenance
ENWW
9.
The settings are saved and the product control panel returns to the WAKE TIME submenu.
10. Touch Exit to exit the menu.
Setting the Sleep delay
Use the Sleep-delay feature to set the period of time that the MFP must be idle before it enters the
Sleep mode.
NOTE If the Sleep-delay feature is turned off in the RESETS menu, the MFP never enters
the Sleep mode. Selecting a Sleep-delay value automatically turns the Sleep feature on. The
default value for the Sleep-delay setting is 45 minutes.
To set the Sleep delay
ENWW
1.
Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2.
Scroll to and touch Configure Device.
3.
Scroll to and touch SYSTEM SETUP.
4.
Touch SLEEP DELAY.
5.
Scroll to and touch the Sleep-delay setting that you want.
6.
The settings are saved and the product control panel returns to the SYSTEM SETUP submenu.
7.
Touch Exit to exit the menu.
Setting the real-time clock
135
Configuring and verifying an IP address
Use any of three options to assign and configure TCP/IP addresses on an HP Jetdirect print server:
●
HP Web Jetadmin
●
Embedded Web server
●
Control panel
TCP/IP assignment
The system administrator or primary user is responsible for determining the TCP/IP address for a
specific print server. To confirm the TCP/IP address or to learn how to use TCP/IP on a network, go
to the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com. Click Search in the upper-left corner of the Web page and
search for TCP/IP Overview.
Automatic discovery
The product is equipped with an HP Jetdirect embedded print server. If a BootP or DHCP server is
available during product installation, the print server is automatically assigned an IP address for use
on the network. The print server defaults to 192.0.0.192 (Legacy default) or to 169.254.x.x (Auto IP)
if the print server cannot obtain an IP address over the network from a BootP or DHCP server. The
default that is assigned depends on the particular network (small/private or enterprise) by using
sensing algorithms.
To determine the new IP address, print a configuration page and check the TCP/IP status and
address.
Dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP)
When the product is turned on, the HP Jetdirect print server broadcasts DHCP requests. The DHCP
automatically downloads an IP address from a network server. The DHCP servers maintain a fixed
set of IP addresses and only loan an IP address to the print server. Consult the operating system
documentation to set up a DHCP service on your network.
Verifying the TCP/IP configuration
Print a configuration page at the product control panel. Check the TCP/IP status and the TCP/
IP addresses. If the information is incorrect, check the hardware connections (cables, hubs, routers,
or switches) and reconfirm the validity of the IP address.
Changing an IP address
Use the following procedures to change the product TCP/IP address.
To change an IP address by using HP Web Jetadmin
Open HP Web Jetadmin. Type the TCP/IP address in the Quick Device Search field and click Go.
At the top menu bar, follow this procedure for discovery options.
136
1.
In the drop-down menu, click Devices.
2.
In the drop-down menu, click New Devices. Click Go.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
ENWW
3.
Click the appropriate column header (such as IP address or Device Model) to arrange the list of
available devices in ascending or descending order.
4.
Highlight the product to configure, and click Open Device.
5.
From the sub-menu at the top of the HP Web Jetadmin screen, click Configuration.
6.
Click the network link located on the left side of the configuration screen.
7.
Type the new IP information. Scroll down for more options.
8.
Click Apply to save the settings.
9.
Click the Refresh button located next to the question mark on the right side of the screen.
10. Verify the IP information by clicking Status Diagnostics or by printing a configuration page.
To change an IP address by using the embedded Web server
The MFP has an embedded Web server that can be used to modify the TCP/IP parameters. In order
to use the embedded Web server, the HP Jetdirect print server must have an IP address already
configured. On a network, this is done automatically during initial product installation.
1.
In a supported Web browser, type the current IP address of the HP Jetdirect print server as the
URL. The Device Status page of the embedded Web server appears.
2.
Click Networking. Use this page to modify the MFP network configuration.
To change an IP address by using the control panel
To manually configure or verify the IP address by using the product control panel, follow the
instructions below.
1.
Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2.
Scroll to and touch Configure Device.
3.
Scroll to and touch I/O.
4.
Scroll to and touch EMBEDDED JETDIRECT MENU.
5.
Touch TCP/IP.
6.
Scroll to and touch CONFIG METHOD.
7.
Scroll to and touch MANUAL.
8.
Scroll to and touch MANUAL SETTINGS.
9.
Scroll to and touch IP Address: X.
10. Touch the left and right arrows to select each byte of the IP address.
11. Use the numeric keypad to enter the value of each byte.
12. Touch OK to save the IP address.
13. Scroll to and touch SUBNET MASK.
14. Touch the left and right arrows to select each byte of the subnet mask.
ENWW
Configuring and verifying an IP address
137
15. Use the numeric keypad to enter the value of each byte of the subnet mask.
16. Touch OK to save the subnet mask.
17. Scroll to and touch DEFAULT GATEWAY.
18. Touch the left and right arrows to select each byte of the default gateway.
19. Use the numeric keypad to enter the value of each byte of the default gateway.
20. Touch OK to save the default gateway.
138
Chapter 4
Maintenance
ENWW
Upgrading the firmware
The MFP has remote firmware update (RFU) capability. Use the information in this section to
upgrade the MFP firmware. The overall process involves the following steps:
1.
Determine the current level of firmware that is installed on the MFP.
2.
Go to the HP Web site and find out whether a firmware update is available. If an update is
available, download the latest firmware to the computer.
3.
Transfer the new firmware from the computer to the MFP.
Determining the current level of firmware
To determine the current level of firmware, view the configuration information on the MFP control
panel. To view the configuration information, follow these instructions.
1.
Press Menu.
2.
Touch Information.
3.
Touch PRINT CONFIGURATION. The configuration page prints.
4.
The firmware datecode is listed in the section called Device Information. The firmware
datecode has this format: YYYYMMDD XX.XXX.X. The first string of numbers is the date, where
YYYY represents the year, MM represents the month, and DD represents the date. For
example, a firmware datecode of 20040225 represents February 25, 2004.
Downloading the new firmware from the HP Web site
To find the most recent firmware upgrade for the MFP, go to http://www.hp.com/go/
clj4730mfp_software. This page provides instructions for downloading the new firmware version.
Transferring the new firmware to the MFP
Use one of the following methods to update the firmware.
Using FTP to upload the firmware through a browser
Follow these steps to update the MFP firmware by using FTP through a browser.
To use a browser for firmware update
NOTE These instructions can be used for both Windows and Macintosh operating systems.
ENWW
1.
Print a configuration page and note the TCP/IP address shown on the EIO Jetdirect page.
2.
Open a browser window.
3.
In the address line of the browser, type ftp://<ADDRESS>, where <ADDRESS> is the
address of the MFP. For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type
ftp://192.168.0.90.
Upgrading the firmware
139
4.
Locate the downloaded .RFU file for the MFP.
5.
Drag and drop the .RFU file onto the PORT1 icon in the browser window.
NOTE The MFP turns off and then on automatically to activate the update. When the update
process is complete, a Ready message displays on the MFP control panel.
Using FTP to upgrade the firmware on a network connection
NOTE The MFP can receive an .RFU file update as long as it is in a Ready state.
The elapsed time for an update depends on the I/O transfer time, as well as the time that it takes for
the MFP to reinitialize. The I/O transfer time depends on a number of things, including the speed of
the host computer that is sending the update. If the remote firmware update process is interrupted
before the firmware is downloaded (while Receiving upgrade appears on the product control panel
display), the firmware file must be sent again. If power is lost during the flash DIMM update (while the
Performing upgrade message appears on the control panel display), the update is interrupted and
the message Resend upgrade appears (in English only) on the control panel display. In this case,
you must send the upgrade by using the parallel port. Finally, any jobs that are ahead of the RFU job
in the queue are completed before the update is processed.
Follow these instructions to perform the upgrade by using FTP.
NOTE The firmware update involves a change in the format of nonvolatile random-access
memory (NVRAM). Any menu settings that are changed from the default settings might return
to default settings and must be changed again if you want settings that are different from the
defaults.
To upgrade the firmware on a network connection by using FTP
1.
Take note of the IP address on the HP Jetdirect page. The HP Jetdirect page is the second
page that prints when you print the configuration page.
NOTE Before upgrading the firmware, make sure that the MFP is not in Sleep mode.
Also make sure that any error messages are cleared from the product control panel
display.
140
2.
Open an MS-DOS command prompt on your computer.
3.
Go to the folder where the firmware file is stored.
4.
Type: ftp <TCP/IP address>. For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type
ftp 192.168.0.90.
5.
Press Enter on the keyboard.
6.
When prompted for the user name, press Enter.
7.
When prompted for the password, press Enter.
8.
Type bin at the command prompt.
9.
Press Enter. The message 200 Types set to I, Using binary mode to transfer files appears in
the command window.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
ENWW
10. Type put and then the file name (for example, if the file name is 4730mfp.efn, type put
4730mfp.efn.
11. The following series of messages appears in the command window:
200 PORT command successful
150 Opening BINARY mode data connection
226 Ready
-or226 Processing Job
-or226 Transfer complete
-or12. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the MFP. This can take
approximately five minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the MFP or
computer.
NOTE The MFP automatically turns off and then on again after processing the upgrade.
13. At the command prompt, type: bye to exit the ftp command.
14. At the command prompt, type: exit to return to the Windows interface.
Using HP Web Jetadmin to upgrade the firmware
This procedure requires that HP Web Jetadmin Version 7.0 or later be installed on the computer.
See Using HP Web Jetadmin software on page 639. Complete the following steps to update a single
device through HP Web Jetadmin after downloading the .RFU file from the HP Web site.
1.
Start HP Web Jetadmin.
2.
Open the Device Management folder in the drop-down list in the Navigation panel. Navigate to
the Device Lists folder.
3.
Expand the Device Lists folder and select All Devices. Locate the MFP in the list of devices,
and then click to select it.
To upgrade the firmware for multiple HP LaserJet 4730mfps, select all of them by pressing the
Ctrl key while clicking the name of each MFP.
ENWW
4.
Locate the drop-down box for Device Tools in the upper-right corner of the window. Select
Update Printer Firmware from the action list.
5.
If the name of the .RFU file is not listed in the All Available Images box, click Browse in the
Upload New Firmware Image dialog box and navigate to the location of the .RFU file that you
downloaded from the Web at the start of this procedure. If the filename is listed, select it.
6.
Click Upload to move the .RFU file from your hard drive to the HP Web Jetadmin server. After
the upload is complete, the browser window refreshes.
Upgrading the firmware
141
7.
Select the .RFU file from the Printer Firmware Update drop-down menu.
8.
Click Update Firmware. HP Web Jetadmin sends the selected .RFU file to the MFP. The
product control panel shows messages that indicate the progress of the upgrade. At the end of
the upgrade process, the control panel shows the Ready message.
Using MS-DOS commands to upgrade the firmware
To update the firmware by using a network connection, follow these instructions.
1.
From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type the following: copy /B
<FILENAME> \\<COMPUTERNAME>\<SHARENAME>, where <FILENAME> is the name of
the .RFU file (including the path), <COMPUTERNAME> is the name of the computer from which
the MFP is being shared, and <SHARENAME> is the MFP share name. For example: C:
\>copy /b C:\9200fW.RFU \\YOUR_SERVER\YOUR_COMPUTER.
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path
in quotation marks. For example, type: C:\>copy /b "C:\MY DOCUMENTS
\3500FW.RFU" \\YOUR_SERVER\YOUR_COMPUTER.
2.
142
Press Enter on the keyboard. The product control panel shows a message that indicates the
progress of the firmware upgrade. At the end of the upgrade process, the product control panel
shows the Ready message. The message 1 file(s) copied displays on the computer screen.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
ENWW
Upgrading the HP Jetdirect firmware
The HP Jetdirect network interface in the MFP has firmware that can be upgraded separately from
the MFP firmware. This procedure requires that you install HP Web Jetadmin Version 7.0 or later on
the computer. See Using HP Web Jetadmin software on page 639. Complete the following steps to
update the HP Jetdirect firmware by using HP Web Jetadmin.
1.
Open the HP Web Jetadmin program.
2.
Open the Device Management folder in the drop-down list in the Navigation panel. Navigate to
the Device Lists folder.
3.
Select the device that you want to update.
4.
In the Device Tools drop-down list, select Jetdirect Firmware Update.
5.
Under Jetdirect firmware version the HP Jetdirect model number and current firmware version
are listed. Make a note of these.
6.
Go to http://www.hp.com/go/wja_firmware.
7.
Scroll down to the list of HP Jetdirect model numbers and find the model number you wrote
down.
8.
Look at the current firmware version for the model, and see if it is later than the version you
wrote down. If it is, right-click on the firmware link, and follow the instructions on the Web page
to download the new firmware file. The file must be saved into the <drive>:\PROGRAM FILES
\HP WEB JETADMIN\DOC\PLUGINS\HPWJA\FIRMWARE\JETDIRECT folder on the computer
that is running the HP Web Jetadmin software.
9.
In HP Web Jetadmin, return to the main device list and select the digital sender again.
10. In the Device Tools drop-down list, select Jetdirect Firmware Update again.
11. On the HP Jetdirect firmware page, the new firmware version is listed under Jetdirect
Firmware Available on HP Web Jetadmin. Click the Update Firmware Now button to update
the Jetdirect firmware.
ENWW
Upgrading the firmware
143
144
Chapter 4
Maintenance
ENWW
5
Theory of operation
This chapter provides information about the following topics:
ENWW
●
Basic operation
●
Formatter system
●
Engine control system
●
Laser/scanner system
●
Image formation system
●
Pickup/feed system
●
Scanner system
●
2 X 500-sheet paper feeder
●
Output devices
145
Basic operation
The HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp functions are divided into the following systems:
●
Engine control system
●
Laser/scanner system
●
Image formation system
●
Pickup/feed system
●
Scanner system
●
2 X 500-sheet paper feeder
●
Output devices
The engine control system controls the laser/scanner system, the image formation system, and the
pickup/feed system. The engine control system performs the printing operation after receiving a print
command from the external device through the formatter. The engine control system also receives
status from each system and sends necessary information back to the formatter.
This chapter describes each of these four systems thoroughly.
Figure 5-1 Basic system operation
146
Chapter 5
Theory of operation
ENWW
Operation sequence
A microcomputer in the engine control system controls the operation sequence for the MFP. The
basic operation sequence (see Table 5-1 Basic operation sequence on page 147) describes the main
operational periods from the point when the MFP is turned on until a print operation is completed and
each motor stops rotating.
NOTE In the following table, “ETB” stands for “electrostatic transfer/transport belt.”
Table 5-1 Basic operation sequence
Period
Purpose
Remark
WAIT (wait period)
From the time the power
switch is turned on until the
ETB cleaning is completed.
To clear a potential on the
drum surface and to clean
the ETB.
During this period, the MFP
checks the toner level and
detects whether the
cartridges are present. The
MFP also executes the
pulse width modulation
adjustment, color
registration adjustment, and
image density calibration
control as required.
STBY (standby period)
From the end of the WAIT or
LSTR period or last rotation
until the formatter inputs a
print command or until the
power is turned off.
To keep the MFP ready to
print.
When the formatter sends a
Sleep command, the MFP
enters Sleep mode.
INTR (initial rotation period)
From immediately after the
formatter inputs a print
command until the TOP
signal is sent to the formatter.
To stabilize the
photosensitive drum
sensitivity in preparation for
a print operation.
When the formatter sends a
print command in
preparation for printing.
PRINT (print period)
From the end of the INTR
period until the leading edge
detection sensor detects
paper and then turns off the
transfer positive bias.
To form an image on the
photosensitive drum
according to the video signal
input from the formatter and
to transfer the toner image
to the paper.
After the power is turned on,
the cartridge is cleaned
every 35 pages and the ETB
is cleaned every 100 pages.
LSTR (last rotation period)
From the end of the PRINT
period until the drum motor
stops.
To deliver the paper out of
the MFP and to clean the
ETB.
The last rotation period lasts
until the instant the formatter
sends a print command.
Then the initial rotation
period starts again.
Operation sequence (scanner)
ENWW
Period (sequence)
Description
Power on
During this time, the scanner motors rotate, the MFP checks the status of all the sensors,
the scanner lamp is illuminated, the optical scan head moves from its home position, the
scanner calibrates, and then the optical scan head returns to its home position.
Initialization
The period of time after the initial power-on sequence and before the MFP is ready to scan
or copy. During this time, the scanner and ADF initialization is completed, scanner
calibration is performed, and the ADF checks for media in the input tray.
Basic operation
147
Period (sequence)
Description
Standby
The period of time from the end of the initialization sequence until a request for a scan.
During this time, the MFP might go into Sleep mode and the scan carriage rests in its home
position.
Scan
The period of time immediately following a request for a scan. The scanner fan turns on,
the scan start position is adjusted, the MFP performs the scan, and data is sent to the
formatter.
Power on sequence
The power on sequence initializes the MFP and checks for possible malfunctions or paper jams.
Figure 5-2 Power on sequence on page 149 shows the MFP status from power on to standby mode.
148
Chapter 5
Theory of operation
ENWW
Power ON
CPU Initialization
ASIC Initialization
Start-up Fan
Video interface communication start
Internal communication start
Residual paper jam check
Pressurize fixing unit
Developing roller
engagement/diseng
agement check
Engaged
Disengage developing roller
Disengaged
Environment detection
Motors initial drive
Cartridge presence check
Residual paper check
Scanner initial drive
Transfer roller position
detection
Out of home position
Home position
Shift home position
Drum phase adjustment
Toner level detection
ETB cleaning
Color misregistration correction
Image stabilization control
Standby
Figure 5-2 Power on sequence
ENWW
Basic operation
149
Formatter system
The formatter PCB is responsible for the following actions:
●
Receiving and processing print data from the various MFP interfaces
●
Monitoring control panel inputs and relaying MFP status information (through the product control
panel and the bidirectional I/O)
●
Developing and coordinating data placement and timing with the print engine
●
Storing font information
●
Communicating with the host computer through the bidirectional interface
●
Controlling the Sleep mode
The formatter monitors the MFP continuously through the video interface. When the MFP is ready to
print, the formatter sends a signal to the DC controller, which turns the laser on or off based on the
signal. Figure 5-3 Formatter system on page 150 shows the formatter system.
The formatter also provides the electrical interface and mounting locations for an EIO card, two
memory DIMMs, two additional flash memory cards (a third slot is reserved for firmware), hard disk,
and optional analog fax accessory.
Formatter
DC controller PCB
/TOP
/BD
Laser/Scanner unit
VIDEO signals
Bk laser driver
VIDEO signals
M laser driver
VIDEO signals
C laser driver
VIDEO signals
Y laser driver
External devices
(host computer, etc.)
VDO, /VDO
SC
Figure 5-3 Formatter system
Sleep mode
This feature conserves power after the MFP has been idle for an adjustable length of time. Set the
time length in the Configure Device menu, under SYSTEM SETUP. When the MFP is in Sleep
mode, the product control panel backlight is turned off, but the MFP retains all printer settings,
150
Chapter 5
Theory of operation
ENWW
downloadable fonts, and macros. The default setting is 30 MINUTES. You can turn Sleep mode off in
the Configure Device menu, under RESETS.
The MFP exits Sleep mode and enters the warm-up cycle when any of the following occurs:
●
A print job, valid data, or a PML or PJL command is received at the parallel port, EIO card, or
USB 2.0 connector.
●
A product control panel button is pressed.
●
The right upper and lower covers are opened.
●
The engine test button is pressed.
NOTE MFP error messages override the Sleep mode on message. The MFP enters Sleep
mode at the appropriate time, but the error message continues to appear.
Image Resolution Enhancement technology (REt)
The formatter contains circuitry for Image Resolution Enhancement technology (REt), which modifies
the standard video dot data on its way to the DC controller PCB to produce “smoothed” line edges.
The REt can be turned on or off from the product control panel or from some software programs. The
default setting is medium.
NOTE The REt settings that are sent from software programs or printer drivers override the
control panel settings.
Input/Output
This section explains the MFP input/output (I/O) capabilities.
Parallel interface
The formatter receives incoming data through its bidirectional interface (IEEE-1284). The I/O
provides high-speed and two-way communication between the MFP and the host, allowing the user
to change MFP settings and monitor MFP status from the host computer. The user can configure the
HIGH SPEED item on the control panel menu. (This item is found by navigating to the Configure
Device menu, navigating to the I/O menu, and selecting PARALLEL INPUT.) The default setting,
YES, allows the I/O to run at the higher speeds supported by most newer computers. When set to
NO, the parallel interface runs at the slower mode that is compatible with older computers. The user
can also configure the ADVANCED FUNCTIONS item. The default setting, ON, allows for two-way
parallel communications. The OFF mode disables the advanced functionality. The I/O is compatible
with the bidirectional parallel interface standard.
USB 2.0 connector
The HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp supports a USB 2.0 connector on the back of the MFP. You must
use an A-to-B type USB cable.
ACC accessory port
This MFP also includes a third-party accessory (ACC) port that uses USB host protocol.
ENWW
Formatter system
151
Flash
Optional flash is available in 4 MB flash memory DIMMs for storing forms, fonts, and signatures.
Hard disk
The hard disk is mounted in an EIO slot on the formatter. The hard disk is used to create multiple
original prints (mopies) and store forms, fonts, and signatures.
CPU
The HP LaserJet 4730mfp formatter incorporates a 533 MHz RISC processor.
FIH (foreign interface harness)
The FIH allows connection to third-party devices, such as copy counters and biometric security
devices.
MFP memory
If the MFP encounters difficulty managing available memory, a clearable warning message will
appear on the product control panel.
Some MFP messages are affected by the auto-continue and clearable warning settings from the
Configure Device menu, under SYSTEM SETUP. If Clearable Warning = Job is set on the product
control panel, warning messages appear on the control panel display until the end of the job from
which they were generated. If Clearable Warning = On is set, warning messages appear on the
control panel until is pressed. If an error occurs that prevents printing and Autocontinue = Off is
set, the message appears until Ignore is touched.
Read-only memory
Besides storing microprocessor control programs, the read-only memory (ROM) stores dot patterns
of internal character sets (fonts).
Random-access memory
The random-access memory (RAM) contains the page, I/O buffers, and the font storage area. It
stores printing and font information received from the host system, and can also serve to temporarily
store a full page of print-image data before the data is sent to the print engine. Memory capacity can
be increased by adding DIMMs to the formatter. Note that adding memory (DIMMs) might also
increase the print speed for complex graphics.
DIMM slots
The DIMM slots can be used to add memory, fonts, or firmware upgrades.
Flash memory
To upgrade MFP firmware, upload a new firmware image to the MFP.
152
Chapter 5
Theory of operation
ENWW
Nonvolatile memory
The MFP uses nonvolatile memory (NVRAM) to store I/O and information about the print
environment configuration. The contents of NVRAM are retained when the MFP is turned off or
disconnected.
PJL overview
Printer job language (PJL) is an integral part of configuration, in addition to the standard printer
command language (PCL). With standard cabling, PJL allows the MFP to perform the following
functions:
●
Two-way communication with the host computer through a bidirectional parallel connection. The
MFP can tell the host about such things as the control panel settings, and the control panel
settings can be changed from the host.
●
Dynamic I/O switching allows the MFP to be configured with a host on each I/O. The MFP can
receive data from more than one I/O simultaneously, until the I/O buffer is full. This can occur
even when the MFP is offline.
●
Context-sensitive switching allows the MFP to automatically recognize the personality (PS or
PCL) of each job and configure itself to serve that personality.
●
Isolation of print environment settings from one print job to the next. For example, if a print job is
sent to the MFP in landscape mode, the subsequent print jobs print in landscape only if they are
formatted for landscape printing.
PML
The printer management language (PML) allows remote configuration and status readback through
the I/O ports.
Control panel
The formatter sends and receives MFP status and command data to and from a control panel board.
Scanner interface
The formatter receives data from the scanner to produce copies and to send scanned data in e-mail
format.
ENWW
Formatter system
153
Engine control system
The engine control system is the brain of the HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp. It controls all the other
systems according to commands from the formatter. The engine control system consists of the
following:
●
DC controller PCB
●
High-voltage PCB
●
Low-voltage power supply PCB
●
Formatter
Each of these components is described in this chapter.
Engine control system
Formatter
DC controller PCB
Laser/Scanner system
Low-voltage power
supply unit
Image formation system
High-voltage power
supply PCB
Pick-up/Feed system
Figure 5-4 Engine control system
NOTE In this manual, the abbreviation "PCB" stands for "printed circuit board". Components
described as a PCB can consist of a single circuit board or a circuit board plus other parts,
such as cables and sensors.
DC controller PCB
The DC controller controls the print operation sequence for the MFP. The sequence of events is as
follows:
1.
Power is turned on.
2.
The low-voltage power supply PCB supplies DC power to the DC controller.
3.
The CPU in the DC controller starts to control MFP operations.
4.
The MFP enters the standby period.
5.
Based on the print command and the image data input from the formatter, the CPU sends a
signal to drive the laser diode, the motors, and the solenoids.
NOTE See the general circuit diagram for detailed information about the MFP circuitry.
154
Chapter 5
Theory of operation
ENWW
Figure 5-5 DC controller PCB
ENWW
Engine control system
155
Block operation
The blocks that make up the DC controller PCB include:
●
CPU. The CPU is a single-chip microcomputer with built-in ROM and RAM. It controls the MFP
engine sequence, ASIC, fuser, pickup motor and lifter motor, solenoids, sensors, and switches.
●
ASIC. Interfaces with the IC, memory, and external devices.
●
Motor driver ASIC. Controls each motor in response to commands from the CPU.
●
Reset IC. Monitors voltage and resets the CPU and ASIC when the power is turned on.
●
EEPROM. Stores backup data.
Motors, fans, and environment sensor
The MFP has ten motors, ten fans, and one environment sensor. Seven of the motors are DC
motors; the other three are stepping motors. Figure 5-6 Motors and fans on page 157 shows the
locations of the motors and fans. Table 5-2 Function of motors, fans, and environment sensor
on page 157 explains the function of each component.
Two of the stepping motors and six of the seven DC motors are used for paper feeding and image
formation. The remaining stepping motor is the developing disengaging motor. The remaining two
DC motors are fan motors.
Since the MFP transfers an image in four colors in line onto the media, small changes in the
rotational speed of the motor are likely to cause color misalignment. The DC motors used for image
formation are precisely controlled to account for rotational speed fluctuation.
156
Chapter 5
Theory of operation
ENWW
+
,
-
.
/
+*
0
1
2
3
Figure 5-6 Motors and fans
Table 5-2 Function of motors, fans, and environment sensor
Name
Function
Type
Failure detection
M1: Yellow (Y) cartridge
motor
Drives the photosensitive
drum, developing cylinder,
and stirrer plate
DC motor
Yes
M2: Cyan (C) cartridge motor
M3: Magenta (M) cartridge
motor
ENWW
Engine control system
157
Table 5-2 Function of motors, fans, and environment sensor (continued)
Name
Function
Type
Failure detection
M5: Fuser motor
Drives the fuser pressure
roller and delivery roller
DC motor
Yes
M6: Fuser pressure release
motor
Drives the fuser pressure
release mechanism
Stepping motor
No
M7: ETB motor
Drives the ETB
DC motor
Yes
M8: Developing alienation
motor
Disengages the
photosensitive drums from
the developing cylinder
Stepping motor
No
M9: Pickup motor
Drives the pickup roller and
feed roller
Stepping motor
No
M10: Lifter motor
Moves the lifters
DC motor
No
FAN1: Rear exhaust fan
Exhausts heat around the
ETB, drum motors, and
formatter
DC motor
Yes
FAN2: Cartridge fan
Exhausts heat around the
fuser and cartridges
DC motor
Yes
FAN3: Delivery fan
Exhausts heat around fuser
and delivery unit
DC motor
Yes
FAN4: Power supply fan
Exhausts heat around the
pickup motor and lowvoltage power supply
DC motor
Yes
Duplexer fan
Exhausts heat around the
duplexer
DC motor
Yes
ETB fan
Exhausts heat around the
ETB assembly
DC motor
Yes
Fuser fan
Exhausts heat around the
fuser
DC motor
Yes
Control fan #1
Exhausts heat around the
formatter and DC controller
DC motor
Yes
Control fan #2
Exhausts heat around the
formatter and DC controller
DC motor
Yes
Sub power supply fan
Exhausts heat around the
sub power assembly
DC motor
Yes
Environment sensor
Detects the temperature and
humidity levels inside the
MFP
NA
Yes
M4: Black (K) cartridge motor
Failure detection
The DC controller can detect motor and fan failures as described below.
158
Chapter 5
Theory of operation
ENWW
Drum motor failure detection
The DC controller determines the drum motor failure and notifies the formatter of an error status
when it encounters the following conditions.
NOTE The drum motor failure detection operates in the same manner for each color
separately.
●
Drum motor start-up abnormality. The interval of the drum motor speed detection signal does
not reach the specified interval after 1.5 seconds of the drum motor drive start.
●
Drum motor rotation abnormality. The interval of the drum motor speed detection signal stays
at an irregular interval for two seconds and longer after it has reached the specified interval.
Fuser motor failure detection
The DC controller determines the fuser motor failure and notifies the formatter of an error status
when it encounters the following conditions.
●
Fuser motor start-up abnormality. The interval of the fuser motor speed detection signal does
not reach the specified interval after 1.5 seconds of the fuser motor drive start.
●
Fuser motor rotation abnormality. The interval of the fuser motor speed detection signal stays
at an irregular interval for two seconds and longer after it has reached the specified interval.
ETB motor failure detection
The DC controller determines the ETB motor failure and notifies the formatter of an error status when
it encounters the following conditions.
●
ETB motor start-up abnormality. The interval of the ETB motor speed detection signal does
not reach the specified interval after 1.5 seconds of the ETB motor drive start.
●
ETB motor rotation abnormality. The interval of the ETB motor speed detection signal stays
at an irregular interval for two seconds and longer after it has reached the specified interval.
Rear exhaust fan failure detection
The DC controller detects a rear exhaust fan failure and notifies the formatter of an error status when
the rear exhaust fan lock detection signal is input for ten seconds continuously.
Cartridge fan failure detection
The DC controller detects a cartridge fan failure and notifies the formatter of an error status when the
cartridge fan lock detection signal is input for ten seconds continuously.
Delivery fan failure detection
The DC controller detects a temporary locked status when the delivery fan lock detection signal is
input for 0.5 seconds continuously after 0.1 seconds of delivery fan drive start. The DC controller
starts the drive delivery fan for four seconds at the time of temporary locked status determination. If
the delivery fan lock detection signal is input for four seconds, it detects a delivery fan failure and
notifies the formatter of an error status.
ENWW
Engine control system
159
Power supply fan failure detection
The DC controller detects a power supply fan failure and notifies the formatter of an error status
when the power supply fan lock detection signal is input for ten seconds continuously.
Scanner fan failure detection
The DC controller detects a scanner fan failure and notifies the formatter of an error status when the
scanner fan lock detection signal is input.
ADF fan failure detection
The DC controller detects a ADF fan failure and notifies the formatter of an error status when the
ADF fan lock detection signal is input.
Control fans #1 and #2 failure detection
The DC controller detects a control fan failure and notifies the formatter of an error status when the
control fan lock detection signal.
Sub power supply fan failure detection
The DC controller detects a sub power supply fan failure and notifies the formatter of an error status
when the sub power supply fan lock detection signal is input.
ETB fan failure detection
The DC controller detects an ETB fan failure and notifies the formatter of an error status when the
ETB fan lock detection signal is input.
Other fan failures can also be detected.
Low-voltage power supply
The low voltage power supply unit generates DC power and controls the fuser. The low voltage
power supply unit consists of the following circuits:
●
Fuser control circuit. Controls the fuser heater temperature in the fuser.
●
Low-voltage power supply circuit. Generates the DC power required in the MFP.
Figure 5-7 Low-voltage power supply circuits on page 161 shows each circuit of the low voltage power
supply unit.
160
Chapter 5
Theory of operation
ENWW
Figure 5-7 Low-voltage power supply circuits
Fuser control circuit
This MFP uses a ceramic heating method to heat the fuser. Figure 5-8 Fuser power supply circuit
on page 161 shows the configuration of the fuser power supply.
Figure 5-8 Fuser power supply circuit
ENWW
Engine control system
161
The fuser power supply system has three main components:
●
Fuser heater. A ceramic heater heats the fuser sleeve. The heater has a U-shaped heating
element on its surface.
●
Thermistors. Two thermistors are in the fuser sleeve: one in the center, and the other at the
end. Each thermistor monitors the temperature in the fuser sleeve.
●
●
Main thermistor. The main thermistor controls print temperature and between-sheets
temperature. It contacts the inside surface of the fuser sleeve at the center and detects the
fuser sleeve temperature.
●
Sub thermistor. The sub thermistor detects the one-sided temperature rise of the fuser
heater, the initial rotation temperature control, and the start-up temperature control. It
contacts the one side of the fuser heater and detects the fuser heater temperature.
Thermoswitch. The thermoswitch prevents the fuser heater temperature from rising abnormally
high. It is located above the center of the fuser sleeve. If the fuser heater temperature rises
abnormally high, the contact is broken to cut off the power supply to the heater.
These temperature controls are performed by the fuser control circuit and the fuser heater
safety circuit according to the commands from the CPU in the DC controller.
Table 5-3 Fuser temperatures
162
Media
Temperature
Engine speed
Any
Auto
Auto
Plain
Auto
Auto
Preprinted
~ 195°C (383°F)
Full
Letterhead
~ 195°C (383°F)
Full
Overhead transparencies
~ 180°C (356°F)
1/3
Prepunched
~ 195°C (383°F)
Full
Labels
~ 180°C (356°F)
1/2
Bond
~ 195°C (383°F)
Full
Recycled
~ 195°C (383°F)
Full
Color
~ 195°C (383°F)
Full
Light
~ 175°C (347°F)
Full
Intermediate
~ 180°C (356°F)
1/2
Heavy
~ 180°C (356°F)
1/2
Extra heavy
~ 170°C (338°F)
1/2
Cardstock
~ 170°C (338°F)
1/2
Rough
~ 180°C (356°F)
1/2
Glossy
~ 180°C (356°F)
1/2
Heavy glossy
~ 165°C (329°F)
1/3
Extra heavy glossy
~ 180°C (356°F)
1/3
Chapter 5
Theory of operation
ENWW
Table 5-3 Fuser temperatures (continued)
Media
Temperature
Engine speed
Tough paper
~ 180°C (356°F)
1/3
Envelopes
~ 180°C (356°F)
1/2
Low-voltage power supply circuit
The low-voltage power supply circuit converts AC power from the wall receptacle into DC power to
cover the DC loads.
Figure 5-9 Low-voltage power supply circuit
The AC power is supplied to the low-voltage power supply circuit by turning on the power switch
(SW101). The AC power is then converted into +24V, +5V and +3.3V to serve the DC power load
requirements.
ENWW
Engine control system
163
Protective functions
Two fuses, FU101 and FU102, protect against overcurrent and overvoltage to prevent failures in the
power supply circuit. If there is a supply error, such as a short-circuit or overvoltage, the low-voltage
system automatically cuts off the output voltage. The fuses blow and cut off the AC power, once AC
overcurrent flows into the AC line.
If DC voltage is not being supplied from the low-voltage power supply circuit, turn off the power
switch (SW101). Do not turn the power on again until the root cause is found. If the cause is not at
the load side, the protective function may still work.
NOTE If the low-voltage power supply is shut down for protection, turn the power off (by
switching off or unplugging the MFP) and leave the MFP off for approximately three minutes.
Then turn the MFP on.
Safety
For safety, the +24V is divided into two: +24VA and +24VB (+24VB1 and +24VB2). The +24VA is
supplied from the DC controller, whereas +24VB stops when the door switch (SW1) is cut off. The
high-voltage power supply PCB and motors are supplied with the +24VB. They stop when the front
cover is opened. This is to protect users and service technicians from injury. The +24VB also
functions as the DOOR OPEN DETECTION signal (DOPEN). The CPU determines that the door is
open when the +24VB supply stops.
Sleep mode
Sleep mode reduces power consumption during periods of inactivity. When the DC controller
receives a Sleep command from the formatter, the controller stops the supply of +24V and +5V
power by operating the power-save circuit. At the same time, it sends a POWER SAVE MODE signal
(PSAVE) to the low-voltage power supply circuit. The low-voltage power supply circuit implements
PSAVE upon receiving the /PSAVE signal. The MFP returns to the WAIT period once it receives a
command from the formatter ending Sleep mode.
Power supply recognition
The low-voltage power supply circuit recognizes the voltage specification (100V or 200V) that the
MFP uses and the CPU switches the temperature control firmware for the fuser accordingly. The
CPU monitors the 100V POWER SUPPLY DETECTION signal (PS100V). When the MFP is
connected to the 100V power source, the temperature control firmware is switched for the 100V
specification. In the same way, when the MFP is connected to the 200V power source, it is switched
for the 200V specification.
Heater temperature control
The heater temperature control detects the surface temperature of the fuser sleeve and controls the
current flowing to the induction heating coil. The heater temperature control circuit is shown in Figure
5-10 Heater temperature control circuit on page 165.
164
Chapter 5
Theory of operation
ENWW
Figure 5-10 Heater temperature control circuit
The fuser heater temperature is monitored by two thermistors: the main thermistor (TH1) and the sub
thermistor (TH2). The main thermistor controls the print temperature and the between-sheets
temperature. The sub thermistor detects the one-sided temperature rise of the fuser heater, and
controls the initial rotation temperature and the start-up temperature.
The CPU (IC1101) on the DC controller monitors the voltage of the fuser heater temperature signals.
The CPU sends the fuser heater drive signal (FSRD1) according to the voltage level. The fuser
heater control circuit controls the fuser temperature so the heater remains at the target temperature.
The fuser temperature control is divided into the following four sequences.
NOTE During standby, the fuser temperature is maintained at about 76.7°C (170°F) to
accommodate a first-print time of less than 15 seconds.
Initial rotation temperature control
This control melts the grease inside the fuser sleeve and lubricates the sleeve when the power is
turned on to prevent sleeve damage. If the sub thermistor detects the temperature of below 50°C
(122°F) at power-on, the CPU turns on the fuser heater for a prescribed time period before it drives
the fuser motor.
Start-up temperature control
This control determines the start-up power provided to the fuser heater according to the temperature
detected by the sub thermistor at heater energization. If the heater is energized within 30 seconds
after the previous print completion, the heater control starts at this temperature point.
ENWW
Engine control system
165
Print temperature control
This control maintains the temperature of the fuser sleeve at its targeted temperature during the
printing operation. The CPU gradually raises the targeted temperature in one printing process. This
prevents the fuser temperature from falling while the media goes through the fuser roller. The
targeted temperature also varies according to the number of prints when continuous printing. The
targeted temperature varies depending on the media types.
Between-sheets temperature control
This control maintains the temperature of the fuser heater below its normally targeted temperature
during continuous printing. This prevents the excessive temperature rise of the fuser pressure roller
while uncovering the paper portion of between-sheets with low-speed mode. The targeted
temperature varies according to the between-sheets intervals and the media types.
Temperature protective function
This function detects an abnormal temperature rise of the fuser and interrupts power supply to the
fuser heater. The following three protective components prevent an abnormal temperature rise of the
fuser heater.
●
CPU
●
Fuser heater safety circuit
●
Thermoswitch
Protective function by the CPU
The CPU always monitors the output voltage of the main and sub thermistors (FSRTH1, FSRTH2). If
the voltage of the FSRTH1 is approximately 0.9V and lower (equivalent to 230°C (446°F) and
higher), or the voltage of the FSRTH2 is approximately 0.46V and higher (equivalent to 285°C (545°
F) and higher), the CPU detects a fuser failure and then performs the following sequence:
1.
The CPU sets the fuser heater drive signal (FSRD1) to inactive and turns the heater off.
2.
The CPU sets the relay drive signal (FSRLD) to stop through the ASIC.
3.
The fuser heater safety circuit sets the main thermistor relay drive signal (RLD-) to inactive.
4.
The fuser heater safety circuit sets the sub thermistor relay drive signal (RLD+) to inactive.
5.
The relay drive circuit releases the relays (RL101 and RL102) to interrupt power supply to the
fuser heater.
Protective function by the fuser heater safety circuit
The fuser heater safety circuit monitors the output voltage of the main and sub thermistors (FSRTH1,
FSRTH2). If the voltage of the FSRTH1 is approximately 0.8V and lower (equivalent to 240°C (464°
F) and higher), or the voltage of the FSRTH2 is approximately 0.41V and higher (equivalent to 293°C
(559°F) and higher), the circuit detects a fuser failure and performs the following sequence:
166
1.
The fuser heater safety circuit makes the main thermistor relay drive signal (RLD-) inactive.
2.
The fuser heater safety circuit makes the sub thermistor relay drive signal (RLD+) inactive.
3.
The relay drive circuit releases the relays (RL101 and RL102) to interrupt power supply to the
fuser heater.
Chapter 5
Theory of operation
ENWW
Protective function by the thermoswitch
When the temperature of the fuser heater rises abnormally high and the detected temperature of the
thermoswitch (TP) exceeds approximately 250°C (482°F), the thermoswitch is disconnected and the
power supply to the fuser heater is immediately cut off.
NOTE The actual temperature of the fuser heater is about 30° higher than the thermoswitch,
as the thermoswitch is not contact with the fuser heater.
Temperature failure detection
The CPU determines the fuser failure, stops the MFP engine, and notifies the formatter of an fuser
failure when it encounters the following conditions:
Start-up failure (warm-up failure)
The CPU determines a start-up failure:
●
If the detected temperature of the main thermistor does not reach 185°C (365°F) within 30
seconds of heater energization during the wait period.
●
If the heater does not enter the Ready mode within 30 seconds of heater energization during
the initial rotation period.
Abnormal low temperature of main thermistor (no conduction)
The CPU presumes the main thermistor has no conduction:
●
If the detected temperature of the main thermistor is kept 40°C (104°F) or lower for four
seconds continuously, from heater energization until the heater is turned off during the wait
period.
●
If the detected temperature of the main thermistor is kept 70°C (158°F) or lower for four
seconds continuously, from initial rotation start until the media reaches the fuser during the
initial rotation period.
●
If the detected temperature of the main thermistor is kept 130°C (266°F) or lower for 0.5
seconds continuously, from when the media reaches the fuser until the heater is turned off
during the print period.
Abnormal high temperature of main thermistor
The CPU presumes an abnormal high temperature of the main thermistor if the detected temperature
of the main thermistor is kept 230°C (446°F) and higher for 0.1 seconds continuously.
Abnormal low temperature of sub thermistor (no conduction)
The CPU presumes the sub thermistor has no conduction:
ENWW
●
If the detected temperature of the sub thermistor is kept 60°C (140°F) or lower for four seconds
continuously, from heater energization until the heater is turned off during the wait period.
●
If the detected temperature of the main thermistor is kept 90°C (194°F) or lower for 2.5 seconds
continuously, from initial rotation start until the media reaches the fuser during the initial rotation
period.
Engine control system
167
●
If the detected temperature of the main thermistor is kept 120°C (248°F) or lower for 0.5
seconds continuously, from when the media reaches the fuser until the heater is turned off
during the print period.
●
If the detected temperature of sub thermistor is kept 50°C (122°F) or lower for 0.5 seconds
continuously during the standby period.
Abnormal high temperature of sub thermistor
The CPU determines the abnormal high temperature of sub thermistor if the detected temperature of
the sub thermistor is kept 285°C (545°F) and higher for 0.1 seconds continuously.
Drive circuit abnormality
The CPU determines the drive circuit abnormality if the ZERO CROSSING signal (ZEROX) is not
detected for the specified time period.
High-voltage power supply
The high-voltage power supply PCB produces the voltage biases that are applied to the primary
charging roller, developing cylinder, developing blade, attraction roller, and transfer roller. There are
two types of biases: DC positive bias and DC negative bias. The high-voltage power supply PCB is
controlled by the DC controller.
168
Chapter 5
Theory of operation
ENWW
Figure 5-11 High-voltage power supply block diagram
Generation of biases
Generation of primary charging bias: The primary charging bias is the DC negative bias that is
generated to apply negative potential to the photosensitive drum in preparation for image formation.
This bias is generated for each color (Y, C, M, K) in the primary charging high-voltage power supply
circuit. The high-voltage power supply PCB applies the primary charging bias (PRI1, PRI2, PRI3,
PRI4) to the primary charging rollers in each cartridge at the specified timing. The value of the
primary charging bias varies in response to commands from the DC controller.
Generation of developing bias: The developing bias is the DC negative bias that is generated to
adhere toner to an electrostatic latent image formed on the photosensitive drum. This bias is
generated for each color. The high-voltage power supply PCB applies the developing biases (DEV1,
DEV2, DEV3, DEV4) to the developing cylinders in each cartridge at the specified timing. The value
of the developing bias varies in response to commands from the DC controller.
ENWW
Engine control system
169
The developing voltage (bias) causes the toner to adhere to the electrostatic image that the laser/
scanner assembly created on the photosensitive drum. Two types of developing biases are used: the
developing DC negative bias and the developing AC bias. The high-voltage circuit on the power
supply generates both biases. These biases are superimposed on one another and then applied to
the primary charging roller, which transfers the biases to the drum. The biased developing cylinder
picks up toner particles and deposits them onto the electrostatic image on the photosensitive drum.
The image is now visible on the drum.
Generation of developing blade bias: The developing blade bias (BL) is the DC negative bias that
is generated to charge the toner. This bias is generated for each color in the developing blade highvoltage power supply circuit in the high-voltage power supply PCB. The high-voltage power supply
PCB applies the developing blade biases (BL1, BL2, BL3, BL4) to the developing blade in each
cartridge at specified timing. The value of the developing blade bias varies in response to the
command from the DC controller.
Generation of attraction bias: The attraction bias is generated to attract paper to the ETB and to
transfer toner onto the paper efficiently. Both DC positive and DC negative biases are generated
when attracting paper and cleaning the ETB. The high-voltage power supply PCB applies the
attraction biases (ATTS) to the attraction roller in the ETB unit at the specified timing. The value of
the attraction bias varies in response to the command from the DC controller. The DC controller
changes the value of the attraction bias and regulates it in constant current control in response to the
ATTRACTION CURRENT VALUE RETURN signal (HVATTS) sent from the high-voltage power
supply PCB. The following are the printing sequences.
●
Attraction charging bias: This bias charges the paper positively or negatively and makes the
negatively charged toner transfer easily.
●
Between-sheets bias: This bias prevents the residual toner on the ETB from adhering to the
attraction roller in the between-sheets during continuous printing.
●
Cleaning bias: This bias prevents the residual toner on the ETB from adhering to the attraction
roller during ETB cleaning.
Generation of transfer bias: The transfer bias is generated to transfer toner onto the paper. Both
DC positive and DC negative biases are generated in the transfer high-voltage power supply circuit
in the high-voltage power supply PCB. The DC positive bias is generated when transferring toner,
and the DC negative bias is generated when cleaning the ETB. The high-voltage power supply PCB
applies the transfer biases (TR1, TR2, TR3, TR4) to the transfer roller in the ETB unit according to
the print sequences. The value of the transfer bias varies in response to the command from the DC
controller. The DC controller changes the value of the transfer bias and regulates it in constant
current control in response to the TRANSFER CURRENT VALUE RETURN signals (HVTR1S,
HVTR4S) and the HVATTS signal sent from the high-voltage power supply PCB. The following are
the printing sequences.
170
●
Print bias: This bias transfers toner on the photosensitive drum surface onto the paper during
printing. The transfer roller is applied with the DC positive bias.
●
Between-sheets bias: This bias prevents the residual toner on the ETB from adhering to the
attraction roller in the between-sheets during continuous printing.
●
Cleaning bias: This bias cleans the ETB by returning any toner remaining on the ETB surface
to the photosensitive drum. The transfer rollers in the yellow and magenta cartridges (first and
third colors) are applied with DC negative bias. The rollers in cyan and black cartridges (second
and fourth colors) are applied with DC positive bias.
Chapter 5
Theory of operation
ENWW
Sub power supply assembly
The sub power assembly provides power to the ADF and the image scanner. It is connected to the
low-voltage power supply and the DC controller.
Video interface control
The video interface allows communication between the formatter and the DC controller. The
formatter always monitors the status of the MFP by using the video interface. It sends the VIDEO
signals to the DC controller through the video interface when the MFP is ready to print. The DC
controller turns the laser on or off based on the signals it receives.
Figure 5-12 Video interface control
The VIDEO INTERFACE signal is exchanged during printing operations, as described below.
ENWW
1.
When the MFP engine is ready to print, the DC controller notifies the formatter using the
STATUS COMMAND signal (SC).
2.
The formatter sends a print command as a SC signal to the DC controller when the MFP engine
and the data for one page are ready.
3.
The DC controller drives the scanner motor and sends the HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONOUS
signals to the formatter after receiving the print command.
4.
The printer engine starts a pickup operation. When the paper arrives at the top of page sensor
(SR12), the DC controller sends the VERTICAL SYNCHRONOUS signal (/TOP) to the formatter.
5.
The formatter sends VIDEO signals in synchronization with the HORIZONTAL
SYNCHRONOUS signals to the DC controller upon a reception of the /TOP signal.
6.
The DC controller controls each color’s laser driver circuit and turns the laser on and off
according to the VIDEO signals. This forms an electrostatic latent image on the photosensitive
drums of each color.
Engine control system
171
172
7.
The latent images on the photosensitive drums are developed by toner and transferred onto
paper in this order: Y (yellow), C (cyan), M (magenta), and K (black).
8.
The toner is fused to the paper in the fuser and the paper is delivered to the delivery tray.
Printing continues if the DC controller receives another print command from the formatter during
the printing operation.
Chapter 5
Theory of operation
ENWW
Laser/scanner system
The laser/scanner system forms the latent electrostatic image on the photosensitive drum according
to video signals sent from the formatter. The main components of each laser/scanner assembly are
the laser driver, scanner motor, mirrors, and focusing lenses. Each color has its own laser/scanner
assembly unit, which is controlled by the DC controller.
Figure 5-13 Laser/scanner assembly
The laser/scanner system uses two laser diodes in one scanning operation to write two lines
simultaneously for high-speed laser scanning. The process is summarized below:
ENWW
1.
After receiving the print command from the formatter, the DC controller activates the scanner
motor to rotate the six-faced scanner mirror.
2.
When the scanner motor starts to rotate, the DC controller allows the laser to emit light and
maintains the scanner motor rotation at a constant speed.
3.
When the scanner motor reaches its specified speed, the formatter sends video signals to the
laser driver PCB through the DC controller. The laser driver emits two laser diodes according to
these signals.
4.
The laser beams pass through the collimator lens and the cylindrical lens, and enter the sixfaced mirror that is rotating at a constant speed.
Laser/scanner system
173
5.
The laser beams are reflected by the six-faced mirror, pass through the focusing lens and the
reflecting mirror that is in front of the six-faced mirror, and focus the photosensitive drum.
6.
While the six-faced mirror rotates at a constant speed, the laser beams on the photosensitive
drum scan the drum.
7.
As the photosensitive drum rotates and the laser beams scan on the photosensitive drum, both
at a constant speed, a latent image is formed the drum.
Laser control
The laser control circuit allows the laser driver IC to turn the laser diodes LD1 and LD2 on and off
according to the image data signals sent by the DC controller.
The DC controller sends video signals (VDODAT11, /VDODAT11, VDODAT12, and /VDODAT12)
and laser control signals (LDCTRL10, (LDCTRL11, and (LDCTRL12) to the logic circuit on the laser
driver IC. The laser driver IC controls the laser according to the combination of the laser control
signals.
Figure 5-14 Laser control circuit block diagram on page 175 illustrates the laser control system.
174
Chapter 5
Theory of operation
ENWW
Figure 5-14 Laser control circuit block diagram
The laser control circuit manages the following control and detection functions:
●
Laser emission control. Allows the laser diodes to turn on and off according to the video signals
sent by the formatter.
●
Automatic power control (APC). Allows the laser diodes to emit light at a constant intensity.
●
Horizontal synchronous control. Aligns the starting position in the horizontal direction.
●
Image masking control. Regulates laser beam emission in non-image area except during the
unblanking interval.
●
Failure detection. Detects failures in the laser diodes.
Scanner control
The scanner motor control rotates the scanner motor in order to strike the laser beam at the correct
position on the photosensitive drum.
ENWW
Laser/scanner system
175
The DC controller divides the oscillation frequency of the oscillator (X1201) and generates the
reference clock signal. It compares the intervals between the reference clock signal and the BD input
signal (/BD1I) with the frequency comparator, and monitors the rotational count of the scanner motor.
The DC controller controls rotational speed by sending an acceleration signal (/SCNACC1) or
deceleration signal (/SCNDEC1) to the scanner motor driver based on the detected rotational speed.
Figure 5-15 Scanner motor circuit diagram on page 176 illustrates the scanner motor control system.
Figure 5-15 Scanner motor circuit diagram
The scanner motor control circuit manages the following control and detection functions:
176
●
Speed control. Maintains the rotational speed of the scanner motor at a constant speed.
●
Phase control. Prevents color misregistration by eliminating rotational variations in each color's
scanner motor and adjusts the phase of the scanner motor.
●
Failure detection. Monitors the frequency comparator in the ASIC and determines whether the
scanner motor is rotating at its specified rotational count.
Chapter 5
Theory of operation
ENWW
Image formation system
The image formation system is the central hub of the MFP. It also forms the toner image on the media.
The image formation system consists of four cartridges, the ETB, and the fuser, which are controlled
by the DC controller. Figure 5-16 Image formation system on page 177 shows the image formation
system.
Figure 5-16 Image formation system
ENWW
Image formation system
177
Image formation process
The image formation process consists of nine steps divided among five functional blocks:
1.
Electrostatic latent image formation block. Forms an electrostatic latent image on the
photosensitive drum.
Step 1: Pre-exposure
Step 2: Primary charging
Step 3: Laser beam exposure
2.
Development block. Makes the electrostatic latent image on the photosensitive drum surface
visible by applying toner.
Step 4: Development
3.
Transfer block. Transfers toner image on the photosensitive drum onto the media.
Step 5: Attraction
Step 6: Transfer
NOTE Toner is transferred onto a sheet of media in the order of yellow (Y), cyan (C),
magenta (M), and black (K) in one printing operation.
Step 7: Separation
4.
Fusing block. Fuses the toner image on the media.
Step 8: Fusing
5.
Cleaning block. Cleans the residual toner on the photosensitive drum.
Step 9: Drum cleaning
178
Chapter 5
Theory of operation
ENWW
Figure 5-17 Image formation process
ENWW
Image formation system
179
Electrostatic latent image formation block
The image formation process begins in the electrostatic latent image formation block. This block
consists of three steps that results in forming an electrostatic latent image on the photosensitive drum:
●
Pre-exposure
●
Primary charging
●
Laser beam exposure
When the last step in this block is complete, areas of the drum surface that have not been exposed
to the laser beam retain a negative charge. The areas that have been exposed to the laser are
neutralized. This neutralized image is called an electrostatic latent image because it is invisible to the
eye.
Time (t)
0
Surface
potential
(V)
Exposed area
Unexposed area
Pre-exposure
(step1)
Primary
charging
(step2)
Laser beam
Transfer (step6) Pre-exposure
exposure (step3)
(step1)
Primary
charging
(step2)
Figure 5-18 Electrostatic latent image formation block
Step 1: Pre-exposure
To prepare for primary charging, light from the pre-exposure LED strikes the photosensitive drum
surface. This eliminates any residual charge on the drum surface to avoid density unevenness.
LED
Photosensitive drum
Figure 5-19 Pre-exposure
180
Chapter 5
Theory of operation
ENWW
Step 2: Primary charging
To prepare for latent image formation, the surface of the photosensitive drum is charged with a
uniform negative potential.
The charging method of this MFP is to charge directly to the photosensitive drum surface from the
primary charging roller, which is interlocked with the drum. The primary charging roller is made of a
conductive rubber. To charge the drum surface negatively, the DC bias is applied to the primary
charging roller.
Step 3: Laser beam exposure
In this step, the latent image is formed on the photosensitive drum by the laser beam. As the laser
beam scans on the negatively charged photosensitive drum, the potential on the exposed area is
neutralized and the negative potential is removed from the drum surface. This area forms an
electrostatic latent image.
Laser beam
Exposed area
Unexposed area
Figure 5-20 Laser beam exposure
Development block
The second part of the image formation process is the development block, where toner is transferred
onto the electrostatic latent image on the surface of the photosensitive drum to create a visible
image. This MFP uses a contact development method that keeps the developing cylinder in contact
with the drum, pushing the toner against the drum surface for development. The toner is nonmagnetic and consists of resins.
Step 4: Development
In this step, the toner adheres to the electrostatic latent image on the photosensitive drum surface.
The toner (developing material) has an insulating property and is charged with a negative potential
by the friction force with the rotating developing cylinder and the developing blade surface. This
negatively charged toner contacts with the photosensitive drum, after the potential is adjusted to be
uniform. As the area of the drum surface where the laser beam exposed has higher potential than
the developing cylinder, the toner charged with almost the same potential with the developing
cylinder adheres to this area. This phenomenon is called contact development and it visualizes the
electrostatic latent image on the drum surface.
ENWW
Image formation system
181
Transfer block
The third part of the image formation process is the transfer block, in which the toner image is
transferred from the photosensitive drum to the media. This block consists of three steps:
●
Attraction
●
Transfer
●
Separation
Step 5: Attraction
To feed the media vertically, it is necessary to push the media against the ETB. The picked up media
is fed as it is pushed against the ETB by the attraction roller. The positive DC bias is applied to the
attraction roller, which charges the media positively to make the negatively charged toner easier to
transfer onto the media during the transfer operation.
ETB
Attraction roller
DC bias
ETB engaged roller
Paper
Figure 5-21 Attaching the media to the ETB
Step 6: Transfer
A positive bias is applied to the transfer charging roller, which is directly opposite the photosensitive
drum. As the ETB passes the transfer charging roller, it picks up a positive charge. The negatively
charged toner on the photosensitive drum is transferred to the positively charged print media. Figure
5-22 Toner transfer on page 183 illustrates this step. This process is repeated for each color as the
ETB carries the media from the bottom cartridge to the top (C, Y, M, K).
In full-color printing, as four colors of toner are piled up on the media, the holding force of the toner
weakens as the transfer process progresses. To counteract this effect, the DC controller increases
the positive DC bias that is applied to the transfer charging roller for each successive color.
182
Chapter 5
Theory of operation
ENWW
ETB
Paper
Transfer roller
Photosensitive
drum
DC bias
Figure 5-22 Toner transfer
Step 7: Separation
The elasticity of media separates the media from the photosensitive drum and the ETB.
ETB
Paper
ETB feed roller
Figure 5-23 Separation
Fusing block
The fourth part of the image formation process is the fusing block, in which the toner image is fused
to the media, making a permanent image that cannot be smeared. This block consists of one step:
fusing.
Step 8: Fusing
This MFP uses the ceramic heater with lower heat capacity to fuse the toner to the media. This
method warms up quickly and does not require the power supply during standby period, resulting in
shortened wait time and reduced power consumption.
ENWW
Image formation system
183
Figure 5-24 Fusing
Cleaning block
The fifth and final part of the image formation process is the cleaning block, in which the
photosensitive drums are cleaned, preparing them for the next print. In the transfer block, not all of
the toner is transferred from the photosensitive drum onto the media, but some remains on the drum
surface. This remaining toner is called residual toner or waste toner. The cleaning block cleans the
photosensitive drum surface to keep a clear image in the next print.
Step 9: Drum cleaning
The cleaning blade scrapes off the leftover toner on the drum surface. The residual (waste) toner is
collected in the waste toner container by the waste toner feed plate.
Print cartridges
The MFP has four different print cartridges, one for each color. However, they share the same
structure, shown in Figure 5-25 Print cartridge on page 185.
184
Chapter 5
Theory of operation
ENWW
DRUM MOTOR
DRIVE signal
Cartridge data
TONER LEVEL signal
Toner level PCB
LED DRIVE signal
DEVELOPING ALIENATION signal
DEVELOPING ALIENATION MOTOR CONTROL signal
DC controller PCB
Memory controller
PCB
Memory tag
Drum motor
M
Photosensitive
drum
Developing alienation
sensor
SR11
M8
Developing alienation block
Toner level sensor (light receiver)
Toner level sensor (light emitter)
Developing alienation motor
Figure 5-25 Print cartridge
The following are the physical components inside the print cartridge:
●
Photosensitive drum
●
Primary charging roller
●
Developing cylinder
●
Toner charging roller
●
Stirrers
●
Waste-toner transfer plate
The photosensitive drum rotation drives the primary charging roller. All other components are driven
by the drum motor.
The developing disengaging motor drives the developing disengaging block, which causes the
developing cylinder to engage with or disengage from the photosensitive drum.
The DC controller uses an LED and a photo diode to monitor the level of toner inside the cartridge. It
stores this information on a memory tag that is built into each cartridge.
ENWW
Image formation system
185
Memory tag
The memory tag is a nonvolatile memory that is built into the print cartridge. It stores information
about the amount of toner in the cartridge and estimates the remaining life. Figure 5-26 Memory tag
on page 186 illustrates how the memory tag operates.
Memory tag contact
Memory tag
Memory data
DC controller PCB
Memory
controller PCB
Cartridge
Figure 5-26 Memory tag
The DC controller reads information from the memory tag whenever the MFP is turned on, whenever
the top cover is closed, and whenever it receives a read command from the formatter.
The DC controller writes information to the memory tag at specified times during a print operation,
whenever it receives a write command from the formatter, and after print completion.
If the DC controller is unable to either read to or write from the memory tag four times in a row, the
DC controller alerts the formatter of a memory tag abnormality.
Cartridge presence detection
The MFP detects the presence of print cartridges when the power is turned on or the door is closed.
There are two procedures to the cartridge presence detection:
●
Memory tag detection
●
Photosensitive drum detection
Memory tag detection
The DC controller reads the data in the memory tag and determines the cartridge presence. If the
reading fails, the DC controller goes to the next procedure, photosensitive drum detection.
Photosensitive drum detection
The DC controller measures the torque of the photosensitive drum. The DC controller stops the drum
motor after driving it for the prescribed period of time. If the motor stops rotating within the specified
period after the stoppage command is sent, the DC controller detects the cartridge presence based
on the large load torque. If it takes more than the prescribed period of time for the motor to stop, the
DC controller detects the cartridge absence based on the small load torque.
When the DC controller detects the cartridge absence, it stops the engine and notifies the formatter.
Figure 5-27 Photosensitive drum detection on page 187 illustrates the drum detection procedure.
186
Chapter 5
Theory of operation
ENWW
Motor rotation (rpm)
Motor rotation (rpm)
Predetermined
time
Motor stop
time
Time (t)
Motor ON
Motor OFF
Specified time (T)
Time (t)
Motor ON
< Cartridge presence >
Motor OFF
Specified time (T)
< Cartridge absence >
Figure 5-27 Photosensitive drum detection
Developing cylinder disengaging control
The developing cylinder is engaged or disengaged when the DC controller drives the developing
alienation motor. When the developing motor rotates clockwise by a command from the DC controller
during power on, printing operation stopped, cleaning cartridges, and monochrome print, the
developing alienation cam rotates. Accordingly, the rear bottom of the cartridge is raised and the
developing cylinder is disengaged from the photosensitive drum with a principle of leverage. The
developing alienation sensor (SR11) detects the position of the developing alienation block.
NOTE Only the developing cylinders in the color cartridges (C, Y, M) are disengaged in
monochrome print, and all of the developing cylinders in any other case.
If the cam stays at its home position for the prescribed period of time or longer during the developing
cylinder disengagement operation, or it does not return to the home position within the prescribed
period of time after alienation is completed, the DC controller detects the developing alienation motor
abnormality, stops the printer engine, and notifies the formatter of the developing alienation motor
abnormality.
ETB (electrostatic transfer/transport belt)
The ETB feeds the media through the MFP and helps transfer toner onto the media. Figure 5-28 ETB
on page 188 illustrates the ETB.
ENWW
Image formation system
187
ETB MOTOR
CONTROL signal
DC controller PCB
ETB
M7
ETB motor
ETB feed roller
Photosensitive drums
Transfer roller
Attraction roller
ETB engaged roller
Figure 5-28 ETB
The following are the components of the ETB:
●
ETB belt
●
ETB feed roller
●
ETB engaged roller
●
Attraction roller
●
Transfer roller
The ETB motor drives the ETB feed roller, causing the belt to rotate. All other rollers are driven by
the belt rotation.
During the printing operation, the picked up media is conveyed between the ETB and the
photosensitive drum. Simultaneously the toner image is transferred onto the media. The ETB is also
188
Chapter 5
Theory of operation
ENWW
used for the color misregistration and image stabilization control. The pattern image for the color
misregistration or image density determination is transferred onto the ETB.
The ETB also controls the following:
●
Transfer roller (Y, C, M) engagement/disengagement detection
●
Transfer roller alienation
●
ETB cleaning
Transfer roller (Y, C, M) engagement/disengagement detection
When the power is turned on, the DC controller applies biases to the transfers roller for yellow and
black, and detects the value of current flown through the ETB according to the current return signals.
The DC controller obtains information on the transfer roller (Y, M, C) engagement and
disengagement. Accordingly, the DC controller executes the transfer roller engage or disengage
control depending on the situation and engages the transfer rollers (Y, M, C).
Transfer roller engagement/disengagement control
This control disengages the transfer rollers (Y, M, C) from the photosensitive drums so that only
black toner is transferred onto the ETB during monochrome printing. The ETB motor (M7) performs
this control by driving the ETB alienation solenoid (SL3) while the motor is rotating according to a
command from the DC controller.
The following is the operational sequence of the transfer roller engagement/disengagement control.
1.
The transfer roller engaging/disengaging cam inside the ETB holds up the transfer roller holder
that contains the Y, M, and C transfer rollers. This brings the ETB into contact with the
photosensitive drums.
2.
When a monochrome print starts, the DC controller turns on the ETB alienation solenoid (SL3)
to rotate the transfer roller engaging/disengaging cam.
3.
The rotation of the transfer roller engaging/disengaging cam pushes the Y, M, and C transfer
rollers down, disengaging the ETB from the photosensitive drums.
When allowing the ETB to engage back with the photosensitive drums, the DC controller turns on the
ETB alienation solenoid (SL3) again. The transfer roller engaging/disengaging cam rotates and
pushes the transfer roller holder. Accordingly, the transfer rollers push the ETB into contact with the
photosensitive drums.
ENWW
Image formation system
189
ETB MOTOR
DRIVE signal
ETB ALIENATION
SOLENOID DRIVE
signal
DC controller PCB
Bk cartridge
SL3
M7
Transfer roller
engaging cam
M cartridge
C cartridge
Y cartridge
Transfer roller holder
Transfer roller
< Transfer roller engaged > < Transfer roller disengaged >
Figure 5-29 Transfer roller engagement/disengagement control
NOTE The Y, M, and C photosensitive drums opposite the transfer rollers stop rotating when
the rollers are disengaged.
Calibration and cleaning
The MFP automatically calibrates and cleans itself at various times to maintain the best print quality.
You can also force the MFP to calibrate by selecting QUICK CALIBRATE NOW or CALIBRATE
NOW from the PRINT QUALITY menu. For information about calibrating the MFP, see Table 5-4
Calibration timing and duration on page 191 or Table 5-5 Cleaning timing and duration on page 191 for
more information.
While the MFP is calibrating or cleaning, it pauses printing. For most calibrations and cleaning, the
MFP does not interrupt a print job, but waits for the job to complete before calibrating or cleaning.
Table 5-4 Calibration timing and duration on page 191 shows when the MFP calibrates, the duration
of the calibration, and the type of calibration that occurs. Table 5-5 Cleaning timing and duration
on page 191 shows when the MFP cleans and the duration of the cleaning. The sections that follow
discuss calibration and cleaning in more detail.
190
Chapter 5
Theory of operation
ENWW
Table 5-4 Calibration timing and duration
Calibration occurrence
Duration
Type of calibration
When you turn the MFP on.
75 seconds for calibration, but because
of other initialization activities, the MFP
takes a total of 2 minutes to be ready
for printing
DMAX, DHALF
When you install one or more print
cartridges that have not previously
been installed in the MFP.
150 seconds (2 minutes, 30 seconds)
DMAX, DHALF, color-plane registration
(CPR)
When 50 pages have been printed
since installing a print cartridge. The
MFP will finish printing the current job
before calibrating.
75 seconds
DMAX, DHALF
When 1,000 pages have printed since
the last calibration. The MFP will finish
printing the current job before
calibrating.
75 seconds
DMAX, DHALF
When eight hours have passed since
the last calibration, but not while the
MFP is in Sleep mode. Typically, this
calibration occurs during the first job or
any control panel interaction after an
overnight idle period.
75 seconds
DMAX, DHALF
When you request calibration from the
control panel (QUICK CALIBRATE
NOW and CALIBRATE NOW).
280 seconds (4 minutes, 40 seconds)
DMAX, DHALF, CPR, drum phase
Table 5-5 Cleaning timing and duration
Cleaning occurrence
Duration
Type of cleaning
When the MFP continuously prints
(with no idle period or spin down) for
51 pages.
either 5 seconds or 21 seconds
primary and toner charging rollers
At intervals of 90 and 140 pages. The
MFP will finish printing the current job
before cleaning.
16 seconds
(5 seconds is the most common)
ETB
ETB cleaning
During this step, all toner particles that remain on the ETB are returned to the photosensitive drums
in each print cartridge. Figure 5-30 ETB cleaning on page 192 illustrates this step.
This control is performed by the DC controller under the following conditions:
ENWW
●
The power is turned on
●
During operation of the color misregistration corrective control
●
During operation of the image stabilization control
●
The door is closed
Image formation system
191
●
After completion in every prescribed number of printings
●
During pickup operation specified by universal size
Positive potential waste toner
Negative potential waste toner
Bk cartridge
M cartridge
C cartridge
DC positive bias
To primary charging
roller
Y cartridge
DC negative bias
DC negative bias
DC negative bias
Figure 5-30 ETB cleaning
The DC controller applies negative bias to the photosensitive drum and both negative and positive
biases to each of the four color transfer rollers. This brings a potential difference between the
photosensitive drum and the ETB, so that both positive and negative charged residual toner on the
ETB is returned to the photosensitive drum at once. The developing cylinder is disengaged from the
photosensitive drum during the cleaning operation to prevent toner in the toner container from
transferring onto the ETB.
Color misregistration corrective control
This control corrects a color misregistration caused by the variation inherent in the laser/scanner unit
and each cartridge. The color misregistration corrective control corrects the horizontal scanning
magnification, the horizontal scanning start position, and the vertical scanning start position.
192
Chapter 5
Theory of operation
ENWW
The DC controller controls the color misregistration unit under the following conditions:
●
At power on or door close after cartridge replacement
●
After job completion in every specified number of printings
●
At a command from the formatter
The following is the operational sequence of the color misregistration corrective control:
1.
The DC controller forms two pattern images for color misregistration detection with four colors
on the ETB when the color misregistration corrective control starts. The two pattern images are
the same pattern, one formed on the left side and the other on the right side.
2.
The DC controller measures the position of each pattern image and calculates the
misregistration amount of each color by controlling the color misregistration unit.
3.
The calculated misregistration information of each color is sent to the formatter.
4.
The formatter controls each color’s video signals according to this information and optimizes the
main-scanning start position, the main-scanning scale, and the sub-scanning start position.
The color misregistration in sub-scanning direction is corrected at printer engine side by the DC
controller controlling the speed of the scanner motor.
NOTE Horizontal magnification is the size of the image in the horizontal direction. Every
color has its own photosensitive drum in each cartridge in this MFP. The positions of each
drum differ and the laser beam lengths vary because of the variations among the cartridges,
so the horizontal scanning area depends on the color. This causes a color misregistration at
the edge of image.
Color misregistration detection
In this MFP, the positions of each color’s misregistration pattern images formed on the ETB are
detected to measure the misregistration amount. The DC controller controls the color misregistration
unit during the foregoing color misregistration corrective control. The color misregistration unit is
placed under the ETB and consists of two detection sensors, each one having a light emitter (LED)
and a light receiver (PD).
The following is the operational sequence of the color misregistration detection.
1.
The DC controller allows the LED to emit light by sending the LED DRIVE signal when the color
misregistration detection starts.
2.
The ETB reflects the light from the LED and the PD in the color misregistration sensor receives
the light. This reflected light intensity differs depending on whether the light is reflected from the
area of toner.
3.
The light receiver converts the received light intensity into voltage and sends it in the form of the
color misregistration signal to the DC controller.
4.
The DC controller detects the positions of the pattern images according to the timing of the color
misregistration signal.
Figure 5-31 Color misregistration detection on page 194 illustrates this process.
ENWW
Image formation system
193
ETB
LED DRIVE signal
Color misregistration
pattern image
COLOR MISREGISTRATION signal
DC controller PCB
Color misregistration sensor (R)
Pattern image
Color misregistration
sensor (L)
Light emitter (LED)
COLOR
MISREGISTRATION
signal
Light receiver (PD)
Figure 5-31 Color misregistration detection
The DC controller notifies the formatter of each error when the following errors are found during the
color misregistration detection. The initial value is reset to the new color misregistration correction
value whenever an error occurs.
●
Color misregistration sensor abnormality warning: The light receiver does not receive light at all.
●
Color misregistration measurement out of range warning: The measurement value is out of
specified range.
Image stabilization control
This controls the variation of the image density caused by an environmental change or deterioration
of the photosensitive drum, toner, etc.
There are three types of image stabilization control. These controls operate when necessary.
194
●
Environmental change control. The environment condition sensor controls the bias according
to the environment conditions.
●
Image density control (D-max). The color misregistration sensor (PS12) calibrates the bias
value when the image density is at max.
●
Image halftone control (D-half). The color misregistration sensor (PS12) calibrates the
halftone data in the formatter.
Chapter 5
Theory of operation
ENWW
Figure 5-32 Image stabilization control
Environmental change control
This control calibrates each bias to obtain the best image possible according to environmental
changes.
The environmental sensor detects the temperature and the humidity. The sensor sends this
information to the DC controller in the form of the temperature detection signal (TEMSNS) and the
humidity detection signal (HUMSNS).
The DC controller monitors the environmental conditions of the MFP based on these two signals.
ENWW
Image formation system
195
The DC controller controls the following biases to prevent image defects when it detects an
environmental change:
●
Developing bias
●
Primary transfer bias
●
Secondary transfer bias
If the environment sensor detects a temperature of below -30ºC (22ºF) or over 80ºC (176ºF), the DC
controller determines this is an "environment sensor abnormality" and sends an error message to the
formatter.
Image density calibration control (DMAX)
This control stabilizes image density by calibrating the values of the developing bias whenever one of
the following events occurs:
●
The detected temperature of the sub thermistor is below 50ºC (122ºF) when the MFP is turned
on.
●
The door is closed after a print cartridge or ETB is replaced.
●
A set number of pages is printed.
●
The specified value of environmental conditions has changed since the last image density
corrective control.
●
The formatter sends an operation command.
Image halftone calibration control (DHALF)
This control measures halftone density output from the formatter and returns the measurements to
the formatter so it can perform halftone calibration. Image density calibration must always be
performed before image halftone calibration.
Image halftone calibration control consists of three steps:
1.
The DC controller forms density patterns on the photosensitive drum in each color using the
optimum developing bias determined during image density calibration.
2.
These density patterns are transferred to the ETB, and the color-registration detection unit
measures the image density of these patterns. Image data is returned to the formatter.
3.
The formatter uses the image data to perform a halftone calibration to obtain an ideal halftone
image.
Image density detection
Each of the image stabilization controls uses the color registration unit at the top of the ETB to
measure image density. The image density detection is performed by the DC controller, which
controls the color misregistration unit during the D-half control. The color misregistration unit is
placed under the ETB and consists of two detection sensors, each having one light emitter (LED)
and one light receiver (PD). Figure 5-33 Image density detection on page 197 illustrates this process.
196
Chapter 5
Theory of operation
ENWW
The following is the operational sequence of the image density control:
1.
The DC controller allows the LED to emit light by sending the LED drive signal. The image
density detection control starts.
2.
The density pattern images on the ETB reflect the light from the LED and the PD in the sensor
receives the light. This reflected light intensity differs depending on the toner density.
3.
The light receiver converts the received light intensity into voltage and sends it as a toner
density signal to the DC controller.
4.
The DC controller converts the toner density signal (analog) into a density value (digital) and
stores it.
The DC controller notifies the formatter of each error when the following errors are found during the
image density detection. When it fails to detect image density, it zeros the density data and notifies
the formatter.
●
Image density sensor abnormality warning: detected ETB surface density is improper.
●
Failed image density detection warning: detected density is improper.
ETB
LED DRIVE signal
Color misregistration
pattern image
COLOR MISREGISTRATION signal
DC controller PCB
Color misregistration sensor (R)
Color misregistration sensor (L)
Light emitter (LED)
Light receiver (PD)
Figure 5-33 Image density detection
ENWW
Image formation system
197
Pickup/feed system
The pickup/feed system consists of various feed rollers that pick up and feed media. This MFP has
four pickup sources: the MP tray, tray 2, and the two trays of the 2 X 500-sheet paper feeder. The
primary delivery source is the face-down tray. The IPTU and stapler/stacker or 3-bin mailbox can
also be used for output.
The multipurpose tray paper sensor (SR4) detects the media presence in the multipurpose tray, and
the cassette paper sensor (SR9) detects the media presence in the cassette. The paper stack
surface sensor (SR10) in the cassette monitors the pickup position of the media stack surface. When
the SR10 detects that the pickup position lowers to a certain level, the DC controller lifts the lifting
plate up to maintain the media stack surface at a specified height. Figure 5-34 Pickup/feed system (1
of 2) on page 199 illustrates this system.
The media size in the cassette and presence of the cassette installed in the MFP are detected by the
cassette paper size detection switch (CSIZE SW). The cassette paper size detection switch consists
of three switches.
The DC controller controls ten motors: pickup motor, ETB motor, four drum motors, fuser motor,
fuser pressure release motor, reversing motor, and lifter motor. There are three solenoids: cassette
pickup solenoid, MP tray pickup solenoid, and duplexing solenoid, for the pickup operation.
There are five photo interrupters: top of page sensor, fuser paper sensor, paper loop sensor 1, paper
loop sensor 2, and paper reversing sensor, on the paper transport path to detect media arrival and
passage. If the media does not reach or pass these sensors within the specified period of time, the
microcomputer (CPU) on the DC controller determines the paper jam and notifies the formatter.
Figure 5-34 Pickup/feed system (1 of 2) on page 199 and Figure 5-35 Pickup/feed system (2 of 2)
on page 201 illustrate this system.
198
Chapter 5
Theory of operation
ENWW
Figure 5-34 Pickup/feed system (1 of 2)
ENWW
Pickup/feed system
199
The pickup/feed system consists of the following motors and solenoids:
200
●
M1: Yellow (Y) drum motor
●
M2: Cyan (C) drum motor
●
M3: Magenta (M) drum motor
●
M4: Black (K) drum motor
●
M5: Fuser motor
●
M6: Fuser pressure release motor
●
M7: ETB motor
●
M9: Pickup motor
●
M10: Lifter motor
●
M8001: Reversing motor
●
SL1: Multipurpose tray pickup solenoid
●
SL2: Cassette pickup solenoid
●
SL8001: Duplexing solenoid
Chapter 5
Theory of operation
ENWW
Figure 5-35 Pickup/feed system (2 of 2)
The pickup/feed system consists of the following sensors and switches:
ENWW
●
SR1: Fuser paper sensor
●
SR2: Delivery tray paper full sensor
●
SR3: Fuser pressure release sensor
●
SR4: Multipurpose tray paper sensor
●
SR9: Cassette paper sensor
●
SR10: Paper stack surface sensor
Pickup/feed system
201
●
SR12: Top of page sensor
●
SR13: Paper loop sensor 1
●
SR14: Paper loop sensor 2
●
SR8001: Paper reversing sensor
●
Media sensor
●
CNT0: Cassette paper size detection switch
●
CNT1: Cassette paper size detection switch
●
CNT2: Cassette paper size detection switch
Figure 5-36 Pickup/feed system on page 202 illustrates the pickup/feed system, which can be divided
into three units:
●
Pickup/feed unit. From the point the media is picked from the tray until it reaches the fuser.
●
Fuser/delivery unit. From the fuser to the face-down tray or other output device.
●
Duplex feed unit. From the duplexing reverse inlet unit to the registration roller.
Figure 5-36 Pickup/feed system
202
Chapter 5
Theory of operation
ENWW
Pickup/feed unit
The pickup/feed block is structured with two blocks. One is the pickup block, which picks up media
from the cassette or the multipurpose tray into the MFP one by one. The other one is the feed block,
which feeds the picked-up media to the fuser. The following sequence of events occurs:
1.
The DC controller rotates the pickup motor (M9), drum motors (M1, M2, M3, M4), ETB motor
(M7), and fuser motor (M5) after receiving a print command from the formatter.
2.
The feed roller and the registration roller rotate as the pickup motor starts to rotate. The
cassette separation roller also begins to rotate. However, the separation roller does not rotate.
3.
Media is picked from the cassette. The cassette pickup solenoid (SL2) is turned on after a
specified time after 'scanner ready'. This rotates the cassette pickup roller and cassette feed
roller to pick up media in the cassette.
Media is picked from the MP tray. The MP pickup solenoid (SL1) is turned on after a specified
time after 'scanner ready'. This rotates the MP tray pickup roller to pick up media in the tray.
4.
Any multiple-fed media is removed by the cassette paper separation roller (paper separation
pad for the MP tray) and a single sheet is fed to the registration roller.
5.
The skew of the media is corrected by the registration shutter. The media is then fed at its
prescribed speed. The formatter specifies the feed speed depending on the media type.
6.
Toner is transferred to the media on the ETB, and the media is fed to the fuser/delivery block.
Cassette detection and cassette media size detection
The MFP can sense whether a cassette is installed correctly, and it can sense the size of the media
in the cassette. Paper-size detection switches at the back of the cassette send this information to the
DC controller. The DC controller determines which size is loaded by reading various switches. See
Table 5-6 Paper tray media size detection on page 203.
Table 5-6 Paper tray media size detection
Paper size
Paper-size detection switch
CNT0
CNT1
CNT2
A4
on
off
off
B5
on
on
off
A5
off
on
off
Letter
on
off
on
Legal
off
on
on
Executive
off
off
on
Custom
on
on
on
No paper tray
off
off
off
Although the cassette determines the media size by reading the switches, the user could select a
different size from what is loaded, creating an error in media-size detection.
ENWW
Pickup/feed system
203
The paper leading-edge sensor detects when the leading edge and the trailing edge of a sheet pass
it. By measuring the time between the passing of the leading edge and trailing edge, the sensor can
determine the actual size of the sheet. If this measured size differs from the size specified by the
formatter or the switch combination, the DC controller determines a mismatch. The sheet is ejected
from the MFP, and the MFP stops.
Cassette pickup operation
This MFP uses the pickup arm method for high-speed media pickup. The pickup arm presses the
pickup roller down on the media stack to feed the media one by one. The pickup roller is attached to
the pickup arm and it is normally held at the original position by the pickup arm. When the pickup
solenoid (SL2) is turned on, the pickup cam rotates and lowers the pickup roller onto the media.
The following is the operational sequence of the cassette pickup mechanism.
1.
When the DC controller turns the cassette pickup solenoid (SL2) on during the cassette pickup
operation, the driving force of the pickup motor (M9) causes the cassette pickup roller and the
pickup cam to rotate.
2.
As the pickup cam rotates, the pickup arm goes down and the rotating cassette pickup roller
touches the media surface. The media in the cassette is fed into the MFP one sheet at a time.
3.
The pickup cam rotation allows the pickup arm to go up and the cassette pickup roller
disengages from the media surface.
4.
The cassette pickup roller stops rotating.
Figure 5-37 Cassette pickup on page 204 illustrates this process.
PICK-UP MOTOR
CONTROL signal
DC controller PCB
Pick-up motor
Cassette
pick-up solenoid
SL2
M9
Pick-up arm
Cassette pick-up roller
Lifting plate
Pick-up cam
Figure 5-37 Cassette pickup
Media lifting operation
This operation maintains the position of the media stack surface at a specified height for a stable
pickup operation. The DC controller rotates the lifter motor (M10) and raises the lifting plate on which
204
Chapter 5
Theory of operation
ENWW
the media stack is loaded. The DC controller monitors the cassette paper sensor (SR9) and the
media stack surface sensor (SR10) when the MFP is turned on, the cassette is installed, and during
the printing operation.
The media lifting operation is divided into two procedures:
●
Initial lift
●
Lifting during printing
Initial lift
The initial lift begins when the cassette is installed in the MFP and the lifting plate remains in the
bottom of the cassette. The DC controller continues driving the M10 until the SR10 detects media.
The SR10 lifts the stack surface up to the pickup position under the following conditions:
●
The SR9 and SR10 detect no media when the power is turned on.
●
The SR10 detects no media when the cassette is installed.
The DC controller stops this operation when the SR10 detects media before the SR9 detects media.
Lift-up during printing
The lifting during printing starts when the stack level reaches a specified level according to the
pickup operation. The DC controller drives the M10 when the SR10 detects no media during the
printing operation. The SR10 then lifts the stack surface up to the pickup position. Figure 5-38 Media
lifting on page 206 illustrates this process.
NOTE The paper lifting operation is also available for the 2 X 500-sheet paper feeders. The
initial lift for the cassette and paper feeders does not occur at the same time because of the
DC power supply limit. The operation starts from the bottom paper feeder and moves upwards.
ENWW
Pickup/feed system
205
Cassette pick-up roller
SR10
Cassette feed roller
SR9
LIFTER MOTOR DRIVE signal
PAPER STACK SURFACE
signal (CSTPS)
CASSETTE PAPER signal
(CSTPE)
DC controller PCB
Cassette separation roller
Lifting plate
M10
Lifter
Cassette pick-up roller
Pick-up position
<Before lift-up>
Pick-up position
<After lift-up>
Figure 5-38 Media lifting
Multiple-feed prevention
This MFP uses the paper separation roller method to prevent multiple feeds. The cassette paper
separation roller rotates in the same direction as the cassette feed roller. The paper separation roller
is imparted with a rotational force, transmitted through the torque limiter. If a multiple feed occurs, the
second paper is pushed back to the cassette and only one sheet is fed into the MFP.
Normally, the cassette paper separation roller is imparted with a rotational force in the same direction
to the cassette feed roller. However, since the paper separation roller touches the feed roller, driving
torque from the feed roller brings the torque limiter functions. The torque limiter shuts the rotational
force from the separation roller. The paper separation roller follows the rotational direction of the feed
roller, in the opposite direction. When the paper is not multiple-fed, the driving force from the feed
roller transmits through the single paper and allows the paper separation roller to rotate in the
opposite direction.
During a multi-feed, the rotational force of the cassette feed roller transmitted to the cassette paper
separation roller becomes weak because of the low friction between the sheets. The torque limiter
does not function and the paper separation roller rotates in the direction of the drive gear, causing
206
Chapter 5
Theory of operation
ENWW
the multiple-fed media to be separated and pushed back to the cassette. Figure 5-39 Media lifting
on page 207 illustrates this process.
Cassette feed roller
Cassette pick-up roller
Driving force transmitted
from cassette feed roller
Paper
Cassette separation roller
Driving force transmitted
from the pick-up motor through the torque limiter
Normally
Multiple-feed
Figure 5-39 Media lifting
Skew correction
The skew correction mechanism compensates for the skew of feeding media. This MFP uses the
registration shutter method to avoid decreasing throughput.
ENWW
1.
When the media is fed to the registration roller, the leading edge of the media hits the
registration shutter to compensate for the skew feeding.
2.
The media is warped as the feed roller keeps pushing the media with the condition that the
media hit the registration shutter.
3.
The stiffness of the media being warped lifts up the registration shutter and the media goes
through the shutter. The skew-feed is corrected without decreasing throughput.
Pickup/feed system
207
Figure 5-40 Skew correction on page 208 illustrates this process.
Registration shutter
1)
Fro
nt
sid
eo
fp
rin
ter
Front side of printer
Registration shutter
Pa
p
er
Paper
2)
3)
Figure 5-40 Skew correction
Media detection
This MFP detects the media types to select the optimum print mode automatically. The DC controller
controls the media sensor during the printing operation for this detection. The media sensor contains
a light emitter (LED) and a light receiver. The light from the emitter is reflected off the media surface
or transmitted through the media. Each light is received at the light receiver.
NOTE The light receiver can detect even a slight difference in the light intensity because the
high-density pixels are integrated in a very small area.
The DC controller turns the media sensor on when the picked-up media passes through the
registration roller. Then it detects the roughness of the media surface, transmitted light intensity, and
thickness according to the patterns (luminance distribution within specified area) of the detected light
208
Chapter 5
Theory of operation
ENWW
by the receiver. Accordingly, the DC controller identifies the media type: either plain paper, thin
paper, thick paper, gloss paper, gloss film, or overhead transparency, and notifies the formatter.
Figure 5-41 Media detection on page 209 illustrates this process.
DC controller PCB
Media sensor
Light
receiver
LED
Lens
Media
Media
LED
Figure 5-41 Media detection
The DC controller switches the media feeding speed according to the detected media type when the
detected media type does not match the selected print mode.
If the DC controller fails to communicate with the media sensor during the media detection, it detects
a media sensor failure and outputs a media sensor abnormality warning to the formatter.
Feed speed control
The type of media in the paper path dictates the speed at which it is fed. The DC controller can
change the feed speed according to type of media. Table 5-7 Paper size detection switch settings
on page 209 shows the relationship between media type and feed speed.
Table 5-7 Paper size detection switch settings
ENWW
Print mode
Media type
Feed speed
Normal
Plain paper
Normal speed
Normal gloss
Plain paper
1/2 speed
Rough
Rough paper
1/2 speed
Pickup/feed system
209
Table 5-7 Paper size detection switch settings (continued)
Print mode
Media type
Feed speed
Thin
Plain paper
Normal speed
Thin rough
Rough paper
1/2 speed
Envelope
Envelope
1/2 speed
Label
Label
1/2 speed
Thick 1
Thick card/postcard
1/2 speed
Thick 2
Thick paper
1/3 speed
Gloss 1
Gloss paper
1/2 speed
Gloss 2 and 3
Gloss paper
1/3 speed
Overhead transparency
OHT film
1/3 speed
Gloss film
Gloss film
1/3 speed
Automatic
Plain paper, thin paper, thick paper,
gloss paper, gloss film, overhead
transparency
N/A
The DC controller performs the following controls depending on the specified print mode.
●
OHT mode. If plain paper, other than OHT is detected, the DC controller determines a media
misprint. The DC controller lets the printing operation continue under the OHT mode only when
it detects the OHT. The same applies to the following sheets in a continuous printing. When the
DC controller outputs the wrong media, it notifies the formatter, cuts off the secondary transfer
bias, delivers the media, and then stops the printer engine.
●
Automatic mode. When automatic mode is selected, the MFP starts the printing operation in
the normal mode. If plain paper, thin paper, thick paper, gloss paper, gloss film, or OHT is
detected, the DC controller switches the print mode to the appropriate mode and executes the
printing operation. In continuous printing, the print mode will not change from the one selected
for the first sheet. However, if the DC controller detects media different from the first page, it
outputs a media misprint.
●
All other print modes. If media other than OHT is detected, the DC controller continues the
printing operation with the selected print mode. It outputs a media misprint only when it detects
OHT. The same applies to the following sheets in the continuous printing.
Fusing and delivery block
The fuser/delivery unit is structured with two blocks. One is the fuser block that fuses toner on the
media. The other is the delivery block, which delivers the fused media to the face-down tray or output
device. The following is the operational sequence of the fuser/delivery unit.
210
1.
The media with toner transferred on the ETB is fed to the fuser.
2.
The paper warp is adjusted with the fuser motor speed control. The feeding speed differs
between the ETB and the fuser, as different motors are used to drive them. This control keeps
the media with a specified warp to prevent image defects and media transport defects.
Chapter 5
Theory of operation
ENWW
3.
The fusing sleeve and the fusing pressure roller fuse the toner onto the media. The media is
then delivered from the fuser.
4.
The image fusing media sensor (SR1) detects the media delivered from the fuser, and then
delivers the media to the face-down tray or other output device.
NOTE If the face-down tray is full of media, the delivery tray paper-full sensor (SR2) detects
that it is full. The DC controller determines the face-down tray media is full, notifies the
formatter, delivers the media currently printing from the MFP, and stops the printer engine.
When the stack of media on the face-down tray is removed, the SR2 detects the media
absence and the printing operation resumes.
Loop control
The media is delivered from the ETB to the fusing pressure roller maintaining the specified warp for
the media type, to prevent image and media transport defects.
The feeding speed of the fusing pressure roller and the ETB are not exactly the same. The following
problems might occur when the media is fed into the fuser.
●
If the rotational speed of the fusing pressure roller is slower than that of the ETB, the media
warp increases and an image defect or media crease might occur.
●
If the rotational speed of the fusing pressure roller is faster than that of the ETB, the media warp
decreases and a color misregistration in the sub-scanning direction occurs as the fusing
pressure roller pulls the media.
To resolve these issues, two sensors are used depending on the media type specified by the
formatter. The sensors bifurcate the warp amount for thick paper and thin paper. The DC controller
monitors the paper loop sensor 1 (SR13) and the paper loop sensor 2 (SR14) to maintain the paper
warp at specified amount by changing the rotational speed of the fusing pressure roller.
Figure 5-42 Loop control on page 212 illustrates this process.
ENWW
Pickup/feed system
211
Figure 5-42 Loop control
Fusing pressure release mechanism
This mechanism automatically releases the fusing pressure to improve media removal and prevent
fusing pressure roller deformation.
The DC controller rotates the cam driven by the fuser pressure release motor (M6) at the prescribed
timing. The lifting plate is pushed down and the fusing pressure roller is released. The fusing
pressure is released under the following conditions:
●
When a paper jam occurs
●
When the power is turned off
●
When Sleep mode is ON/OFF
Figure 5-43 Fusing pressure release on page 213 illustrates this process.
212
Chapter 5
Theory of operation
ENWW
Figure 5-43 Fusing pressure release
Duplex feed unit
This MFP is equipped with an integrated duplexing unit. The duplexing reverse/duplexing feed unit is
structured into two blocks.
One is the duplexing reverse block, that reverses paper in preparation for duplex printing. The
second is the duplexing feed block, which delivers the reversed paper to the registration roller.
ENWW
Pickup/feed system
213
Duplexing unit
Figure 5-44 Duplex feed unit
The duplexing driver PCB controls the duplexing unit. An 8-bit microcomputer in the duplexing driver
PCB controls the sequences of the duplexing unit and serial communication with the DC controller.
The DC controller sends a command to the duplexing driver PCB at the necessary time. The
duplexing driver PCB drives each load, such as motors and solenoids, depending on these
commands. The duplexing driver PCB relays the status information of the duplexing unit to the DC
controller.
The MFP supplies +24VDC to the duplexing unit. The +3.3VDC is generated by +24V DC in the
duplexing driver PCB, which works for the component devices such as sensors and ICs. Figure 5-45
Duplexing driver PCB signal flow on page 214 shows the signal flow in the duplexing driver PCB.
DC controller PCB
Duplexing driver PCB
Paper reversing sensor
+24V
SL
Duplexing solenoid
M
Reversing motor
Duplexing unit fan
Figure 5-45 Duplexing driver PCB signal flow
Duplexing reverse/duplexing feed operation
The media fed to the duplexing unit goes to the opposite direction and proceeds hitting along the
right plate by the oblique roller. This corrects the paper skew and the media is fed into the MFP. The
operational sequence of the duplexing feed is described in Figure 5-46 Duplexing feed on page 215.
214
Chapter 5
Theory of operation
ENWW
Figure 5-46 Duplexing feed
ENWW
1.
Media that has been printed on one side passes through the fuser.
2.
The DC controller sends the reversing command to the duplexing driver at the specified time
after the top of page sensor (SR12) detects the leading edge of paper. The prescribed time is
when the media arrives at the fuser.
Pickup/feed system
215
3.
When the duplexing driver receives the reversing command, it turns on the duplexing solenoid
(SL8001) to move the duplexing deflector. The duplexing driver also rotates the reversing motor
(M8001) clockwise to feed the media to the duplexing unit.
4.
The DC controller sends the duplexing pickup command to the duplexing driver after the
prescribed time from when the fuser paper sensor (SR1) detected the trailing edge of paper.
The prescribed time is when the media passes through the duplexing deflector.
5.
The duplexing driver rotates the reversing motor (M8001) counter clockwise (CCW) to reverse
the media and feed it to the duplexing feed unit when it receives the duplexing pickup command.
6.
The media is fed while hitting its edge to the right guide by the oblique roller in the duplexing
feed unit. Consequently, the paper skew is corrected and the starting position of the image in
main-scanning is determined.
Paper
Oblique rollers
Right guide
Figure 5-47 Paper skew correction
7.
The paper skew is again corrected by the registration shutter. Then the media is printed on the
other side and fed to the face-down tray or other output device.
The MFP can use the following three duplexing modes depending on the paper size and the print
mode. The formatter specifies each duplexing print operation. However, it cannot specify the
operation other than the printable size (LTR, legal, executive, A4, B5-JIS) and the print mode
(normal, thick paper, thin paper, gloss paper, gloss film) for the duplexing print.
1.
Single sheet mode. Duplexing of one sheet at a time (all paper sizes).
2.
Dual sheet mode. Duplexing of two sheets moving at once (all paper sizes print except legal).
3.
Alternating complex mode. Duplexing of three sheets moving at once (all paper sizes print
except legal).
Jam detection
The MFP uses the following sensors to detect the presence of media and to check whether media is
being fed correctly or has jammed:
216
●
Top-of-page sensor (SR12)
●
Fuser paper sensor (SR1)
Chapter 5
Theory of operation
ENWW
●
Delivery tray paper-full sensor (SR2)
●
Reversing paper sensor (SR8001)
The microprocessor on the DC controller checks for jams by timing the media as it moves past these
sensors. If the media does not pass the sensor in a specific period of time, the transport process is
stopped (the motors are turned off and the rollers no longer rotate) and a jam message displays on
the product control panel display.
Pickup delay jam
If the top-of-page sensor (SR12) does not detect the leading edge of the media within a specific
period of time after the media is picked up, the microprocessor on the DC controller PCB determines
that a pickup jam has occurred.
NOTE The MFP attempts to pick up the media several times before determining that a
pickup jam exists. The number of pickup attempts depends on the source (for example, four
attempts occur if tray 1 is the source).
The transport process stops and a 13.%1$2:02X.%2$1:X%3$1:X FUSER JAM message displays on
the product control panel display. For more information about jam messages, see Resolving control
panel messages on page 488.
Pickup stationary jam
If the top-of-page sensor (SR12) continues to detect the leading edge of the media after a specific
period of time has elapsed, the microprocessor on the DC controller PCB determines that a pickup
stationary jam has occurred.
The transport process stops and a 13.%1$2:02X.%2$1:X%3$1:X FUSER JAM message displays on
the product control panel display. For more information about jam messages, see Resolving control
panel messages on page 488.
Delivery delay jam
If the fuser paper sensor (SR1) does not detect the leading edge of the media within a specific period
of time after the top-of-page sensor detects the media, the microprocessor on the DC controller PCB
determines that a delivery delay jam has occurred.
The transport process stops and a 13.%1$2:02X.%2$1:X%3$1:X FUSER JAM message displays on
the product control panel display. For more information about jam messages, see Resolving control
panel messages on page 488.
Door open jam
If the upper right cover, ETB cover, tray 1, IPTU door, or the 2 x 500-sheet paper deck door is
opened during printing, the microprocessor on the DC controller PCB determines that a door open
jam has occurred.
The transport process stops and a 13.%1$2:02X.%2$1:X%3$1:X FUSER JAM message appears on
the product control panel display. For more information about jam messages, see Resolving control
panel messages on page 488.
ENWW
Pickup/feed system
217
Residual paper jam
If the fuser paper sensor (SR1) detects paper during the WAIT or INTR period, or if the top-of-page
sensor or fuser paper sensor detect paper during the automatic delivery period, the microprocessor
on the DC controller PCB determines that a residual paper jam has occurred.
The transport process stops and a 13.%1$2:02X.%2$1:X%3$1:X FUSER JAM message displays on
the product control panel display. For more information about jam messages, see Resolving control
panel messages on page 488.
Reversing unit jam 1
If the paper reversing sensor (SR8001) does not detect the leading edge of the media within a
specified period after the duplexing driver receives a reversing command from the MFP, the
microprocessor on the DC controller PCB determines that a reversing unit jam 1 has occurred.
The transport process stops and a 13.%1$2:02X.%2$1:X%3$1:X FUSER JAM message displays on
the product control panel display. For more information about jam messages, see Resolving control
panel messages on page 488.
Reversing unit jam 2
If the paper reversing sensor (SR8001) continues to detect media for a specified period after it
initially detects the media, the microprocessor on the DC controller PCB determines that a reversing
unit jam 2 has occurred.
The transport process stops and a 13.%1$2:02X.%2$1:X%3$1:X FUSER JAM message appears on
the product control panel display. For more information about jam messages, see Resolving control
panel messages on page 488.
Duplexing pickup unit jam 1
If the top-of-page sensor (SR12) fails to detect the leading edge of media within the specified period
after the duplexing driver receives a duplexing pickup command from the MFP, the microprocessor
on the DC controller PCB determines that a duplexing pickup unit jam 1 has occurred.
The transport process stops and a 13.%1$2:02X.%2$1:X%3$1:X FUSER JAM message displays on
the product control panel display. For more information about jam messages, see Resolving control
panel messages on page 488.
Automatic delivery function
Any residual paper within the MFP is automatically delivered when the power is turned on or when
printing starts. If the top-of-page sensor (SR12) detects paper during the WAIT period, the DC
controller PCB detects that residual paper is present, notifies to the formatter, and stops printing. The
controller drives the motors and delivers the residual paper to the MFP when it receives an automatic
delivery command from the formatter.
218
Chapter 5
Theory of operation
ENWW
Scanner system
The scanner system adds copying and sending functions to the standard MFP printing function. The
scanner assembly consists of an automatic document feeder (ADF) and a flatbed scanner glass
surface.
Original documents that are fed through the ADF are delivered to the ADF output bin, which is
underneath the ADF input tray. Printed copies are delivered to the output device that is attached to
the print engine.
The scanner unit has built-in duplexing capability for scanning two-sided documents.
Figure 5-48 ADF mechanical structure on page 219 shows a cross-section of the ADF.
Figure 5-48 ADF mechanical structure
Electrical system
The scanner assembly electrical system consists of the following components:
●
Charged coupled device (CCD) PCB
●
Inverter PCB
●
Scanner PCB
●
ADF PCB
●
ADF LED PCB
The scanner assembly is connected to the print engine formatter through a flat, flexible cable.
Figure 5-49 Scanner assembly electrical structure on page 220 shows the scanner assembly electrical
structure.
ENWW
Scanner system
219
Figure 5-49 Scanner assembly electrical structure
Motors and fans
The scanner assembly has five motors and two fans. Three of the motors are stepping motors, which
drive the components inside the scanner assembly. The remaining two motors are DC motors, which
drive the two fans.
220
Name
Purpose
Carriage motor
Rotation
Failure detection
Drives the carriage unit Stepping motor
Varies
No
Feed motor
Drives the pickup,
separation, and
registration rollers
Stepping motor
Varies
No
Read motor
Drives the feed and
delivery rollers
Stepping motor
Counterclockwise
No
Chapter 5
Theory of operation
Type
ENWW
Name
Purpose
Type
Rotation
Failure detection
Flatbed fan
Cools the scanner
lamp and the CCD
DC motor
Clockwise
Yes
ADF fan
Cools the motors
DC motor
Clockwise
Yes
Optical assembly
The optical assembly contains the scan carriage and the scanner glass. The scan carriage contains
the lamp, five mirrors, a lens, and the CCD.
Figure 5-50 Scan carriage components
The scanner lamp illuminates a small strip of the document (called the raster line). The mirrors direct
the light through the lens to the CCD. The CCD senses and records the light, creating an analog
representation of the raster line. If the ADF is being used, the document then advances in the ADF to
the next raster line. If the flatbed is being used, the carriage advances to the next raster line. This
advancing and collection process continues to the end of the sheet.
The image data is collected on the scanner controller PCB, where it is processed and sent to the
formatter.
ENWW
Scanner system
221
Figure 5-51 Scan carriage movement
ADF feed system
Pages from the original document enter the ADF from the ADF input tray. A separation roller and
separation pad work together to separate the top sheet from the stack. The page passes through a
set of registration rollers and two sets of feed rollers that advance the page. A set of delivery rollers
delivers the page to the ADF output bin. A bin-full sensor detects when the ADF output bin is full, and
stops the feed mechanism until the bin is emptied.
222
Chapter 5
Theory of operation
ENWW
Figure 5-52 ADF paper path and sensors
ADF jam detection
When the sensors inside the ADF detect a jam, the feed and read motors immediately stop and send
a signal to the scanner controller PCB, which notifies the formatter. An ADF Paper Jam message
displays on the product control panel display.
To clear a jam, open the jam access cover and remove the media. If no sensors detect media after
the jam access cover is closed, the jam message is cleared from the product control panel display.
Residual media jam
During the initialization sequence or after the ADF jam cover has been opened and closed, the
registration sensor, read sensor, and exit sensor are checked for residual media jams. If a sensor
detects the presence of media, the scanner controller PCB detects a residual media jam.
ADF pickup jam
If the leading edge of the media did not reach the registration sensor within a specific period of time,
the scanner controller PCB determines that an ADF pickup jam has occurred.
ADF jam
Jams can occur in three places inside the ADF: at the registration sensor, read sensor, and exit
sensor.
ENWW
Scanner system
223
Registration sensor jam
If the registration sensor does not detect the trailing edge of the media after the leading edge
reaches the scan ready position, the scanner controller PCB determines that an ADF paper jam has
occurred.
Also, when the scanner duplexer is being used, if the registration sensor does not detect the leading
edge of the media after a specific period of time after media enters the duplexer, the scanner
controller PCB determines that a jam has occurred.
Read sensor jam
If the read sensor does not detect the leading edge of the media within a specific period of time, or if
the read sensor does not detect the trailing edge of the media within a specific period of time after it
detects the leading edge, the scanner controller PCB determines that a jam has occurred.
Exit sensor jam
If the exit sensor does not detect the leading edge of the media within a specific period of time after
the leading edge reaches the read sensor, or if the exit sensor does not detect the trailing edge of
the media within a specific period of time after the read sensor detects the trailing edge, the scanner
controller PCB determines that a jam has occurred.
ADF cover-open jam
If the ADF jam access cover is opened while media is feeding through the ADF, a jam occurs.
ADF open jam
If the ADF is opened while media is feeding through the ADF, a jam occurs.
224
Chapter 5
Theory of operation
ENWW
2 X 500-sheet paper feeder
The MFP includes a 500-sheet paper tray (tray 2) and a larger paper deck that contains two 500sheet feeders (trays 3 and 4). The paper path is shown below.
Figure 5-53 2 X 500-sheet feeder paper path
The paper feeder driver PCB controls the 2 X 500-sheet feeder operation sequences. The
microprocessor in the paper feeder driver controls the 2 X 500-sheet feeder sequences and the
communication with the DC controller PCB.
The paper feeder driver drives the solenoid in response to the pickup command. The paper feeder
driver also reports the paper feeder status to the DC controller PCB.
The MFP delivers a charge of +24 V to the paper feeder, which then generates +3.3 V for the
integrated circuits.
ENWW
2 X 500-sheet paper feeder
225
Figure 5-54 2 X 500-sheet feeder I/O block diagram
Pickup and feed operations
The paper pickup and feeding processes for the 2 X 500-sheet feeder are identical to the processes
used for tray 2. See Figure 5-54 2 X 500-sheet feeder I/O block diagram on page 226. The Figure
5-55 2 X 500-sheet feeder pickup and feed diagram on page 227 identifies the components of the
2 X 500-sheet feeder.
226
Chapter 5
Theory of operation
ENWW
Figure 5-55 2 X 500-sheet feeder pickup and feed diagram
ENWW
1.
The DC controller receives a print command from the formatter and sends a pickup command to
the paper feeder driver.
2.
The paper feeder driver rotates the pickup motor (M8101) in the paper feeder, and the feed
roller and the paper feeder separation roller start to rotate.
3.
The DC controller sends the paper feeder pickup start command to the paper deck driver PCB
after the scanner is ready.
4.
The paper deck driver PCB then rotates the paper deck pickup motor (M8201) clockwise to
rotate the paper deck feed roller.
5.
The paper deck driver PCB turns on the paper feeder pickup solenoids (SL8201 and SL8202) to
rotate the paper deck pickup roller and the paper feeder feed roller. At the same time, the PCB
lowers the paper feeder pickup roller. As the pickup roller lowers, it contacts the media surface
and media in the cassette is fed into the MFP.
6.
The separation roller eliminates extra sheets, and a single piece of media enters the feed path.
7.
If the paper stack level goes down to the specified level according to the pickup operation, the
paper lifting operation is performed.
2 X 500-sheet paper feeder
227
NOTE Paper-size detection, multiple-feed prevention, and jam detection for the 2 X 500sheet feeder function in the same manner as the rest of the MFP.
NOTE Paper lifting operation for the 2 X 500-sheet feeder is the same as that of tray 2,
except that the paper feeder driver PCB controls this operation instead of the DC controller.
2 X 500-sheet jam detection
The paper feed sensor (SR8201) detects abnormal feed operation in the 500-sheet paper feeder.
These jams can occur:
●
Paper deck pickup delay jam: If the paper feed sensor (SR8201) does not detect the leading
edge of the media within a specified period after the paper is picked up, the microprocessor on
the DC controller PCB determines that a pickup jam has occurred.
●
Paper deck pickup stationary jam: If the paper feed sensor (SR8201) continues to detect
paper after a specific period of time has elapsed, the microprocessor on the DC controller PCB
determines that a paper deck pickup stationary jam has occurred.
For other jams, see Jam detection on page 216.
228
Chapter 5
Theory of operation
ENWW
Output devices
This section describes the theory of operation for these components:
●
IPTU
●
3-bin mailbox
●
Stapler/stacker
IPTU
The IPTU (intermediate paper transfer unit) is installed at the face-down delivery area of the MFP. Its
function is to transfer paper to the installed output device, such as the stapler/stacker and the 3-bin
mailbox. The standard face-down tray should be removed when installing the IPTU. Paper flow is
illustrated in Figure 5-56 IPTU paper path on page 229.
To delivery options
Figure 5-56 IPTU paper path
The IPTU is controlled by the intermediate paper transfer driver PCB (IPTD PCB). The IPTD PCB
controls the IPTU sequencing and communicates with the DC controller. The DC controller sends
commands to the IPTD PCB at appropriate points in the printing process and the IPTD PCB drives
motors in response to these commands. The IPTD PCB submits status information to the DC
controller.
The MFP supplies +24VDC to the IPTU. The +3.3V for IC is generated by +24V in the IPTD PCB.
Figure 5-57 IPTU PCB flow on page 230 shows the signal flow in the IPTD PCB.
ENWW
Output devices
229
Intermediate paper transfer
driver PCB
DC controller PCB
Top of page sensor
Delivery sensor
+24V
SW
Door open detection switch
M
Feed motor 1
M
Feed motor 2
Figure 5-57 IPTU PCB flow
IPTU transfer operation
The IPTU delivers the fused paper to the output device in the operation shown in Figure 5-58 IPTU
transfer operation on page 231.
230
Chapter 5
Theory of operation
ENWW
;10-/
;10-.
A=> =7 >286 QJIMEK +>@<@D7,
7665 ;=A=?
5?9B6 QJIMEK .
7665 ;=A=?
5?9B6 QJIMEK /
56:9B6?C QJIMEK +>@<@D?,
9MRGPLGFJERG OEOGP RPEMQHGP FPJSGP >43
7GGF PNKKGP
7GGF PNKKGP
7GGF PNKKGP
@?10-/ @?10-.
Figure 5-58 IPTU transfer operation
ENWW
1.
The paper, which has completed the fusing operation, is transferred to the IPTU.
2.
The DC controller sends the drive start command to the IPTD when the fusing paper sensor
(SR1) detects the leading edge of the paper.
3.
The IPTD turns feed motor 1 (M8301) and feed motor 2 (M8302) ON to rotate the feed rollers
upon receiving the drive start command.
4.
The feed rollers deliver the paper to the output device.
Output devices
231
IPTU jam detection
The IPTU is equipped with paper detection sensors to detect the presence of paper and to determine
operational status:
●
Top of page sensor (SR8301)
●
Delivery sensor (SR8302)
The CPU on the IPTD PCB determines a paper jam by checking whether paper is present at the
sensors at the checking timing. The checking timing is stored in the memory of the CPU. If the CPU
determines a jam, it stops the intermediate paper transfer operation and notifies the MFP of the jam.
Pickup delay jam
The CPU determines a pickup delay jam when the top-of-page sensor (SR8301) does not detect the
paper within the specified period after the cassette pickup solenoid (SL2) or the MP tray pickup
solenoid (SL1) is turned ON.
Pickup stationary jam
The CPU determines a pickup stationary jam when the top-of-page sensor (SR8301) does not detect
the trailing edge of the paper within the specified period after the top-of-page sensor (SR8301)
detects the leading edge.
Delivery delay jam
The CPU determines a delivery delay jam when the delivery sensor (SR8302) does not detect the
leading edge of the paper within the specified period after the top-of-page sensor (SR8301) detects
the trailing edge.
Delivery stationary jam
The CPU determines a delivery stationary jam when the delivery sensor (SR8302) does not detect
the trailing edge of the paper within the specified period after the top-of-page sensor (SR8301)
detects the trailing edge.
3-bin mailbox
When the 3-bin mailbox (MBM) is installed, it receives printed media from the print engine and
delivers it to one of its three bins. The 3-bin mailbox has the following components:
●
One feed motor that drives the rollers
●
Two solenoids that operate the inlet deflector and the bin deflector
●
Six sensors that detect the presence of print media and the stack height in the output bins
●
One switch that determines whether the 3-bin mailbox is attached to the MFP correctly
●
One fan that cools components inside the 3-bin mailbox
The 3-bin mailbox has three operating modes: stacker mode, mailbox mode, and function separator
mode.
The MBM driver PCB controls all functions in the 3-bin mailbox. To deliver media to the different
bins, the inlet deflector and the bin deflector change position as required.
232
Chapter 5
Theory of operation
ENWW
Figure 5-59 3-bin mailbox operation
ENWW
Output devices
233
Stacker mode
When configured for stacker mode, the 3-bin mailbox fills the bottom output bin (bin 3) first and then
fills the next highest bin.
Figure 5-60 Media flow when using the stacker mode
Mailbox mode
When configured for mailbox mode, the 3-bin mailbox stacks print media in each bin as determined
by the print job specifications. For example, one user might have all jobs delivered to the bottom bin,
and another user might have all jobs delivered to the top bin.
Function separator mode
When configured for function separator mode, the 3-bin mailbox delivers print media to each bin as
specified by the job type. For example, all copy jobs might be delivered to the top bin, and all faxes
might be delivered to the middle bin.
3-bin mailbox jam detection
The 3-bin mailbox uses the inlet sensor (PS1501) to detect jams. The microprocessor on the MBM
driver PCB determines a jam situation if the sensor indicates that media is present at an unexpected
time or that media is not present at the expected time. The microprocessor on the MBM driver PCB
notifies the formatter that a jam has occurred.
When a jam is detected, the transport process stops and a 13.%1$2:02X.%2$1:X%3$1:X FUSER
JAM message displays on the product control panel display. For more information about jam
messages, see Resolving control panel messages on page 488.
Feed delay jam
If the inlet sensor (PS1501) does not detect the leading edge of the media within a specific time
period after receiving a delivery notice command, the microprocessor on the MBM driver PCB
determines that a feed delay jam has occurred. The time interval is longer for face-up delivery than
for face-down delivery.
234
Chapter 5
Theory of operation
ENWW
Feed stationary jam
If the inlet sensor (PS1501) does not detect the trailing edge of the media within a specific time
period after it detects the leading edge, the microprocessor on the MBM driver PCB determines that
a feed stationary jam has occurred.
Residual media jam
If the inlet sensor (PS1501) detects the presence of media during the initial WAIT period, the
microprocessor on the MBM driver PCB determines that a residual media jam has occurred.
Stapler/stacker
When the stapler/stacker is installed, it receives print media from the print engine and delivers it to
the stapler or stacks it in the output bin. The stapler/stacker has the following components:
●
Four motors that operate the paddle, the jogger, the feed mechanism, and the stapler unit
●
One clamp solenoid
●
Nine sensors that detect the media position and guide positions
●
One switch that detects when the stapler door is open
The stapler/stacker has two operating modes: staple mode and stacker mode.
The stapler/stacker driver PCB controls all functions in the stapler/stacker.
ENWW
Output devices
235
Figure 5-61 Stapler/stacker operation
236
Chapter 5
Theory of operation
ENWW
Staple mode
When the print job specifications require stapling, the pages of the document are gathered inside the
unit. A jogger aligns the pages horizontally, and a paddle aligns the pages vertically. When all pages
of a job are gathered, a clamp compresses the stack and a staple is attached.
After the document is stapled, the jogger guides spread apart to release the stack, and the stapled
document falls into the stacker bin.
Figure 5-62 Jogger operation (top view)
Stacker mode
The stacker mode collates multiple-page print jobs without stapling them.
When the print job requires no stapling, the pages of the document are gathered inside the unit. A
jogger aligns the pages horizontally, and a paddle aligns the pages vertically. When all pages of a
job are gathered, the jogger guides spread apart, releasing the stack, and the document falls into the
stacker bin without being stapled.
Staple jam detection
The stapler/stacker uses the inlet sensor (PS1301) and the delivery sensor (PS1302) to detect jams.
The microprocessor on the stapler/stacker driver PCB determines a jam situation if the sensor
indicates that paper is present at an unexpected time or that paper is not present at the expected
time. The microprocessor on the stapler/stacker driver PCB notifies the formatter that a jam has
occurred.
When a jam is detected, the transport process stops and a 13.%1$2:02X.%2$1:X%3$1:X FUSER
JAM message displays on the product control panel display. For more information about jam
messages, see Resolving control panel messages on page 488.
Feed delay jam
If the inlet sensor (PS1301) does not detect the leading edge of the media within a specific time
period after receiving a delivery notice command, the microprocessor on the MBM driver PCB
determines that a feed delay jam has occurred.
ENWW
Output devices
237
Feed stationary jam
If the inlet sensor (PS1301) does not detect the trailing edge of the media within a specific time
period after it detects the leading edge, the microprocessor on the MBM driver PCB determines that
a feed stationary jam has occurred.
Delivery stationary jam
If the delivery sensor (PS1302) does not detect the trailing edge of the media within a specific time
period after the feed motor has begun rotating, the microprocessor on the MBM driver PCB
determines that a delivery stationary jam has occurred.
Residual media jam
If the inlet sensor (PS1301) detects the presence of media during the initial WAIT period, the
microprocessor on the MBM driver PCB determines that a residual media jam has occurred.
Stapler unit
The stapler unit holds the staple cartridge and the staple motor. The staple cartridge contains up to
10,000 staples. The stapler unit also has three sensors that detect the presence of staples and
staple jams.
238
●
The staple home position sensor (PHOI1) detects when the stapler is in the correct position. If
the stapler is in the incorrect position, the staple/stacker driver PCB notifies the formatter that a
staple jam has occurred.
●
The staple ready sensor (PHOI2) detects when the stapler is self-primed after a new staple
cartridge is installed. If the sensor determines that the self-priming function was unsuccessful,
the staple/stacker driver PCB notifies the formatter that a staple jam has occurred.
●
The staple presence sensor (PHOI3) detects the number of staples in the staple cartridge.
When the number of staples in the cartridge is 20 or fewer, the stapler/stacker driver PCB
notifies the formatter. A STAPLER LOW ON STAPLES message displays on the product
control panel display.
Chapter 5
Theory of operation
ENWW
Figure 5-63 Stapler unit operation
ENWW
Output devices
239
240
Chapter 5
Theory of operation
ENWW
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising